bfd/
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set I960
28 @set M68HC11
29 @set M68K
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set POWERPC
33 @set POWERPC64
34 @set Renesas
35 @set SPU
36 @set TICOFF
37 @set WIN32
38 @set XTENSA
39 @end ifset
40 @c man end
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @format
44 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 @end format
48 @end ifinfo
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
96 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68HC11
148 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset SPU
160 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset TICOFF
163 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset WIN32
166 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset XTENSA
169 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170 @end ifset
171 @end ifclear
172 @ifclear SingleFormat
173 * BFD:: BFD
174 @end ifclear
175 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
179 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
180 * LD Index:: LD Index
181 @end menu
182 @end ifnottex
183
184 @node Overview
185 @chapter Overview
186
187 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188 @cindex what is this?
189
190 @ifset man
191 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
192 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193 @c man end
194
195 @c man begin SEEALSO
196 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198 @file{ld}.
199 @c man end
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212 @ifset man
213 @c For the man only
214 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217 @end ifset
218
219 @ifclear SingleFormat
220 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225 @end ifclear
226
227 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233 @c man end
234
235 @node Invocation
236 @chapter Invocation
237
238 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242 you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244 @c man end
245
246 @ifset UsesEnvVars
247 @menu
248 * Options:: Command Line Options
249 * Environment:: Environment Variables
250 @end menu
251
252 @node Options
253 @section Command Line Options
254 @end ifset
255
256 @cindex command line
257 @cindex options
258
259 @c man begin OPTIONS
260
261 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263 @cindex standard Unix system
264 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266 link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268 @smallexample
269 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270 @end smallexample
271
272 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285 noted in the descriptions below.
286
287 @cindex object files
288 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291 an option and its argument.
292
293 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297 message @samp{No input files}.
298
299 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
310
311 For options whose names are a single letter,
312 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314 option that requires them.
315
316 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
319 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
321 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323 output.
324
325 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330 accepted.
331
332 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335 compiler driver) like this:
336
337 @smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339 @end smallexample
340
341 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349 @smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351 @end smallexample
352
353 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354 linker:
355
356 @table @gcctabopt
357 @include at-file.texi
358
359 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
360 @item -a @var{keyword}
361 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367 @ifset I960
368 @cindex architectures
369 @kindex -A @var{arch}
370 @item -A @var{architecture}
371 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
373 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
375 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
377 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
378 family}, for details.
379
380 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
381 other architecture families.
382 @end ifset
383
384 @ifclear SingleFormat
385 @cindex binary input format
386 @kindex -b @var{format}
387 @kindex --format=@var{format}
388 @cindex input format
389 @cindex input format
390 @item -b @var{input-format}
391 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
392 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
394 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
395 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
396 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
397 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
398 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402 @xref{BFD}.
403
404 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406 linking object files of different formats), by including
407 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
408 particular format.
409
410 The default format is taken from the environment variable
411 @code{GNUTARGET}.
412 @ifset UsesEnvVars
413 @xref{Environment}.
414 @end ifset
415 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
416 @code{TARGET};
417 @ifclear man
418 see @ref{Format Commands}.
419 @end ifclear
420 @end ifclear
421
422 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424 @cindex compatibility, MRI
425 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
427 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
428 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
429 @ifclear man
430 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @ifset man
433 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434 @end ifset
435 Introduce MRI script files with
436 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
437 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
439 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441 @cindex common allocation
442 @kindex -d
443 @kindex -dc
444 @kindex -dp
445 @item -d
446 @itemx -dc
447 @itemx -dp
448 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454 @cindex entry point, from command line
455 @kindex -e @var{entry}
456 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
457 @item -e @var{entry}
458 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
467 @kindex --exclude-libs
468 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
470 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
471 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476 be treated as hidden.
477
478 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489 regardless of this option.
490
491 @cindex dynamic symbol table
492 @kindex -E
493 @kindex --export-dynamic
494 @item -E
495 @itemx --export-dynamic
496 When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497 dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498 which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500 If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501 contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502 mentioned in the link.
503
504 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507 linking the program itself.
508
509 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
510 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
511 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
512
513 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
514 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
515 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
516
517 @ifclear SingleFormat
518 @cindex big-endian objects
519 @cindex endianness
520 @kindex -EB
521 @item -EB
522 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
523
524 @cindex little-endian objects
525 @kindex -EL
526 @item -EL
527 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
528 @end ifclear
529
530 @kindex -f @var{name}
531 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
532 @item -f @var{name}
533 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
534 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
535 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
536 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
537 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
538
539 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
540 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
541 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
542 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
543 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
544 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
545 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
546 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
547 machine specific performance.
548
549 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
550 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
551
552 @kindex -F @var{name}
553 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
554 @item -F @var{name}
555 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
556 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
557 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
558 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
559 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
560
561 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
562 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
563 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
564 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
565 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
566 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
567 @var{name}.
568
569 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
570 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
571 object files.
572 @ifclear SingleFormat
573 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
574 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
575 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
576 environment variable.
577 @end ifclear
578 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
579 creating an ELF shared object.
580
581 @cindex finalization function
582 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
583 @item -fini=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
585 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
586 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
587 the function to call.
588
589 @kindex -g
590 @item -g
591 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
592
593 @kindex -G @var{value}
594 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
595 @cindex object size
596 @item -G @var{value}
597 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
598 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
599 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
600 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
601 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
602
603 @cindex runtime library name
604 @kindex -h @var{name}
605 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
606 @item -h @var{name}
607 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
608 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
609 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
610 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
611 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
612 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
613
614 @kindex -i
615 @cindex incremental link
616 @item -i
617 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
618
619 @cindex initialization function
620 @kindex -init=@var{name}
621 @item -init=@var{name}
622 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
623 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
624 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
625 function to call.
626
627 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
628 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
629 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
630 @item -l @var{namespec}
631 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
632 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
633 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
634 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
635 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
636 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
637
638 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
639 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
640 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
641 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
642 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
643 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
644 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
645 @var{filename}.
646
647 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
648 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
649 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
650 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
651 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
652 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
653
654 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
655 archives multiple times.
656
657 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
658
659 @ifset GENERIC
660 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
661 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
662 behaviour of the AIX linker.
663 @end ifset
664
665 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
666 @kindex -L @var{dir}
667 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
668 @item -L @var{searchdir}
669 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
670 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
671 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
672 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
673 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
674 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
675 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
676 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
677 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
678 option is specified.
679
680 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
681 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
682
683 @ifset UsesEnvVars
684 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
685 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
686 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
687 @end ifset
688
689 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
690 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
691 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
692
693 @cindex emulation
694 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
695 @item -m @var{emulation}
696 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
697 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
698
699 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
700 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
701
702 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
703 configured.
704
705 @cindex link map
706 @kindex -M
707 @kindex --print-map
708 @item -M
709 @itemx --print-map
710 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
711 information about the link, including the following:
712
713 @itemize @bullet
714 @item
715 Where object files are mapped into memory.
716 @item
717 How common symbols are allocated.
718 @item
719 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
720 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
721 @item
722 The values assigned to symbols.
723
724 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
725 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
726 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
727 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
728 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
729 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
730 linker script containing:
731
732 @smallexample
733 foo = 1
734 foo = foo * 4
735 foo = foo + 8
736 @end smallexample
737
738 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
739 option is used:
740
741 @smallexample
742 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
743 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
744 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
745 @end smallexample
746
747 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
748 scripts.
749 @end itemize
750
751 @kindex -n
752 @cindex read-only text
753 @cindex NMAGIC
754 @kindex --nmagic
755 @item -n
756 @itemx --nmagic
757 Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
758 @code{NMAGIC} if possible.
759
760 @kindex -N
761 @kindex --omagic
762 @cindex read/write from cmd line
763 @cindex OMAGIC
764 @item -N
765 @itemx --omagic
766 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
767 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
768 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
769 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
770 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
771 specification published by Microsoft.
772
773 @kindex --no-omagic
774 @cindex OMAGIC
775 @item --no-omagic
776 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
777 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
778 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
779 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
780
781 @kindex -o @var{output}
782 @kindex --output=@var{output}
783 @cindex naming the output file
784 @item -o @var{output}
785 @itemx --output=@var{output}
786 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
787 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
788 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
789
790 @kindex -O @var{level}
791 @cindex generating optimized output
792 @item -O @var{level}
793 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
794 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
795 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
796 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
797 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
798 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
799 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
800
801 @kindex -q
802 @kindex --emit-relocs
803 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
804 @item -q
805 @itemx --emit-relocs
806 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
807 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
808 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
809 in larger executables.
810
811 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
812
813 @kindex --force-dynamic
814 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
815 @item --force-dynamic
816 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
817 to VxWorks targets.
818
819 @cindex partial link
820 @cindex relocatable output
821 @kindex -r
822 @kindex --relocatable
823 @item -r
824 @itemx --relocatable
825 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
826 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
827 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
828 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
829 @code{OMAGIC}.
830 @c ; see @option{-N}.
831 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
832 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
833 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
834
835 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
836 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
837 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
838 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
839 with input files in other formats at all.
840
841 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
842
843 @kindex -R @var{file}
844 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
845 @cindex symbol-only input
846 @item -R @var{filename}
847 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
848 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
849 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
850 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
851 programs. You may use this option more than once.
852
853 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
854 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
855 the @option{-rpath} option.
856
857 @kindex -s
858 @kindex --strip-all
859 @cindex strip all symbols
860 @item -s
861 @itemx --strip-all
862 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
863
864 @kindex -S
865 @kindex --strip-debug
866 @cindex strip debugger symbols
867 @item -S
868 @itemx --strip-debug
869 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
870
871 @kindex -t
872 @kindex --trace
873 @cindex input files, displaying
874 @item -t
875 @itemx --trace
876 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
877
878 @kindex -T @var{script}
879 @kindex --script=@var{script}
880 @cindex script files
881 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
882 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
883 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
884 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
885 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
886 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
887 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
888 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
889 options accumulate.
890
891 @kindex -dT @var{script}
892 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
893 @cindex script files
894 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
895 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
896 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
897
898 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
899 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
900 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
901 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
902 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
903 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
904 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
905 @samp{gcc}).
906
907 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
908 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
909 @cindex undefined symbol
910 @item -u @var{symbol}
911 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
912 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
913 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
914 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
915 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
916 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
917
918 @kindex -Ur
919 @cindex constructors
920 @item -Ur
921 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
922 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
923 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
924 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
925 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
926 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
927 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
928 @samp{-r} for the others.
929
930 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
931 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
932 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
933 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
934 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
935 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
936 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
937 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
938 in a linker script.
939
940 @kindex -v
941 @kindex -V
942 @kindex --version
943 @cindex version
944 @item -v
945 @itemx --version
946 @itemx -V
947 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
948 lists the supported emulations.
949
950 @kindex -x
951 @kindex --discard-all
952 @cindex deleting local symbols
953 @item -x
954 @itemx --discard-all
955 Delete all local symbols.
956
957 @kindex -X
958 @kindex --discard-locals
959 @cindex local symbols, deleting
960 @item -X
961 @itemx --discard-locals
962 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
963 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
964 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
965
966 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
967 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
968 @cindex symbol tracing
969 @item -y @var{symbol}
970 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
971 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
972 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
973 to prepend an underscore.
974
975 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
976 don't know where the reference is coming from.
977
978 @kindex -Y @var{path}
979 @item -Y @var{path}
980 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
981 for Solaris compatibility.
982
983 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
984 @item -z @var{keyword}
985 The recognized keywords are:
986 @table @samp
987
988 @item combreloc
989 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
990 lookup caching possible.
991
992 @item defs
993 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
994 shared libraries are still allowed.
995
996 @item execstack
997 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
998
999 @item initfirst
1000 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1001 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1002 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1003 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1004 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1005 objects.
1006
1007 @item interpose
1008 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1009 but the primary executable.
1010
1011 @item lazy
1012 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1013 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1014 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1015 Lazy binding is the default.
1016
1017 @item loadfltr
1018 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1019 runtime.
1020
1021 @item muldefs
1022 Allows multiple definitions.
1023
1024 @item nocombreloc
1025 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1026
1027 @item nocopyreloc
1028 Disables production of copy relocs.
1029
1030 @item nodefaultlib
1031 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1032 ignore any default library search paths.
1033
1034 @item nodelete
1035 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1036
1037 @item nodlopen
1038 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1039
1040 @item nodump
1041 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1042
1043 @item noexecstack
1044 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1045
1046 @item norelro
1047 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1048
1049 @item now
1050 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1051 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1052 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1053 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1054 first called.
1055
1056 @item origin
1057 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1058
1059 @item relro
1060 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1061
1062 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1063 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1064
1065 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1066 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1067
1068 @end table
1069
1070 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1071
1072 @kindex -(
1073 @cindex groups of archives
1074 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1075 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1076 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1077 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1078
1079 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1080 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1081 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1082 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1083 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1084 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1085 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1086 resolved.
1087
1088 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1089 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1090 more archives.
1091
1092 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1093 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1094 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1095 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1096 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1097 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1098 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1099 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1100 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1101 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1102 restore the old behaviour.
1103
1104 @kindex --as-needed
1105 @kindex --no-as-needed
1106 @item --as-needed
1107 @itemx --no-as-needed
1108 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1109 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1110 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1111 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1112 needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1113 for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1114 which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1115 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1116 linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
1117 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1118
1119 @kindex --add-needed
1120 @kindex --no-add-needed
1121 @item --add-needed
1122 @itemx --no-add-needed
1123 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1124 DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1125 the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1126 a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1127 @option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1128 for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1129 the default behaviour.
1130
1131 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1132 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1133 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1134
1135 @kindex -Bdynamic
1136 @kindex -dy
1137 @kindex -call_shared
1138 @item -Bdynamic
1139 @itemx -dy
1140 @itemx -call_shared
1141 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1142 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1143 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1144 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1145 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1146 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1147
1148 @kindex -Bgroup
1149 @item -Bgroup
1150 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1151 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1152 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1153 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1154 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1155
1156 @kindex -Bstatic
1157 @kindex -dn
1158 @kindex -non_shared
1159 @kindex -static
1160 @item -Bstatic
1161 @itemx -dn
1162 @itemx -non_shared
1163 @itemx -static
1164 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1165 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1166 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1167 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1168 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1169 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1170 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1171 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1172 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1173 libraries.
1174
1175 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1176 @item -Bsymbolic
1177 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1178 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1179 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1180 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1181 platforms which support shared libraries.
1182
1183 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1184 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1185 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1186 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1187 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1188 libraries.
1189
1190 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1191 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1192 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1193 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1194 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1195 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1196 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1197 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1198 which support shared libraries.
1199
1200 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1201 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1202
1203 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1204 @item --dynamic-list-data
1205 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1206
1207 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1208 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1209 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1210 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1211
1212 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1213 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1214 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1215
1216 @kindex --check-sections
1217 @kindex --no-check-sections
1218 @item --check-sections
1219 @itemx --no-check-sections
1220 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1221 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1222 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1223 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1224 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1225 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1226 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1227 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1228 option.
1229
1230 @cindex cross reference table
1231 @kindex --cref
1232 @item --cref
1233 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1234 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1235 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1236
1237 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1238 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1239 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1240 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1241 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1242
1243 @cindex common allocation
1244 @kindex --no-define-common
1245 @item --no-define-common
1246 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1247 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1248 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1249
1250 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1251 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1252 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1253 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1254 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1255 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1256 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1257 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1258 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1259 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1260
1261 @cindex symbols, from command line
1262 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1263 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1264 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1265 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1266 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1267 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1268 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1269 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1270 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1271 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1272 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1273 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1274 @var{expression}.
1275
1276 @cindex demangling, from command line
1277 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1278 @kindex --no-demangle
1279 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1280 @itemx --no-demangle
1281 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1282 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1283 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1284 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1285 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1286 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1287 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1288 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1289 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1290
1291 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1292 @kindex -I@var{file}
1293 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1294 @item -I@var{file}
1295 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1296 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1297 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1298 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1299 doing.
1300
1301 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1302 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1303 @item --fatal-warnings
1304 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1305 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1306 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1307
1308 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1309 @item --force-exe-suffix
1310 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1311
1312 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1313 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1314 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1315 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1316 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1317 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1318
1319 @kindex --gc-sections
1320 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1321 @cindex garbage collection
1322 @item --gc-sections
1323 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1324 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1325 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1326 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1327 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1328
1329 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1330 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1331 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1332 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1333 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1334 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1335 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1336 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1337 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1338
1339 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1340 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1341 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1342 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1343
1344 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1345 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1346 @cindex garbage collection
1347 @item --print-gc-sections
1348 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1349 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1350 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1351 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1352 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1353 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1354 line.
1355
1356 @cindex help
1357 @cindex usage
1358 @kindex --help
1359 @item --help
1360 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1361
1362 @kindex --target-help
1363 @item --target-help
1364 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1365
1366 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1367 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1368 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1369 @option{-M} option, above.
1370
1371 @cindex memory usage
1372 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1373 @item --no-keep-memory
1374 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1375 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1376 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1377 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1378 while linking a large executable.
1379
1380 @kindex --no-undefined
1381 @kindex -z defs
1382 @item --no-undefined
1383 @itemx -z defs
1384 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1385 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1386 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1387 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1388 libraries being linked in.
1389
1390 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1391 @kindex -z muldefs
1392 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1393 @itemx -z muldefs
1394 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1395 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1396 first definition will be used.
1397
1398 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1399 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1400 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1401 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1402 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1403 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1404 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1405 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1406 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1407
1408 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1409 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1410 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1411 a shared library.
1412
1413 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1414 libraries specified at link time are that:
1415
1416 @itemize @bullet
1417 @item
1418 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1419 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1420 resolvable at load time.
1421 @item
1422 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1423 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1424
1425 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1426 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1427 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1428 appropriate memset function.
1429 @end itemize
1430
1431 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1432 @item --no-undefined-version
1433 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1434 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1435 will be issued instead.
1436
1437 @kindex --default-symver
1438 @item --default-symver
1439 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1440 exported symbols.
1441
1442 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1443 @item --default-imported-symver
1444 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1445 imported symbols.
1446
1447 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1448 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1449 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1450 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1451 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1452 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1453 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1454 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1455 inappropriate.
1456
1457 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1458 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1459 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1460 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1461
1462 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1463 @item --no-whole-archive
1464 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1465 archive files.
1466
1467 @cindex output file after errors
1468 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1469 @item --noinhibit-exec
1470 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1471 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1472 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1473 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1474
1475 @kindex -nostdlib
1476 @item -nostdlib
1477 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1478 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1479 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1480
1481 @ifclear SingleFormat
1482 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1483 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1484 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1485 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1486 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1487 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1488 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1489 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1490 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1491 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1492 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1493 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1494 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1495 @end ifclear
1496
1497 @kindex -pie
1498 @kindex --pic-executable
1499 @item -pie
1500 @itemx --pic-executable
1501 @cindex position independent executables
1502 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1503 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1504 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1505 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1506 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1507 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1508
1509 @kindex -qmagic
1510 @item -qmagic
1511 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1512
1513 @kindex -Qy
1514 @item -Qy
1515 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1516
1517 @kindex --relax
1518 @cindex synthesizing linker
1519 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1520 @item --relax
1521 An option with machine dependent effects.
1522 @ifset GENERIC
1523 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1524 @end ifset
1525 @ifset H8300
1526 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1527 @end ifset
1528 @ifset I960
1529 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1530 @end ifset
1531 @ifset XTENSA
1532 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1533 @end ifset
1534 @ifset M68HC11
1535 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1536 @end ifset
1537 @ifset POWERPC
1538 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1539 @end ifset
1540
1541 On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1542 optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1543 in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1544 instructions in the output object file.
1545
1546 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1547 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1548 @ifset GENERIC
1549 This is known to be
1550 the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1551 @end ifset
1552
1553 @ifset GENERIC
1554 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1555 but ignored.
1556 @end ifset
1557
1558 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1559 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1560 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1561 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1562 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1563 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1564 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1565 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1566 @ifset GENERIC
1567 (such as VxWorks)
1568 @end ifset
1569 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1570 run-time memory.
1571
1572 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1573 or symbols needed for relocations.
1574
1575 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1576 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1577
1578 @ifset GENERIC
1579 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1580 @cindex runtime library search path
1581 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1582 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1583 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1584 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1585 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1586 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1587 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1588 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1589 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1590 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1591
1592 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1593 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1594 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1595 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1596 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1597 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1598 file systems.
1599
1600 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1601 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1602 the @option{-rpath} option.
1603 @end ifset
1604
1605 @ifset GENERIC
1606 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1607 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1608 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1609 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1610 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1611 of the input files.
1612
1613 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1614 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1615 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1616 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1617 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1618 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1619 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1620 appearing multiple times.
1621
1622 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1623 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1624 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1625 runtime linker would do.
1626
1627 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1628 libraries:
1629 @enumerate
1630 @item
1631 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1632 @item
1633 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1634 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1635 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1636 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1637 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1638 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1639 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1640 @item
1641 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1642 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1643 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1644 @item
1645 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1646 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1647 @item
1648 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1649 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1650 @item
1651 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1652 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1653 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1654 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1655 @item
1656 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1657 @item
1658 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1659 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1660 @end enumerate
1661
1662 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1663 warning and continue with the link.
1664 @end ifset
1665
1666 @kindex -shared
1667 @kindex -Bshareable
1668 @item -shared
1669 @itemx -Bshareable
1670 @cindex shared libraries
1671 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1672 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1673 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1674 undefined symbols in the link.
1675
1676 @kindex --sort-common
1677 @item --sort-common
1678 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1679 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1680 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1681 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1682 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1683 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1684 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1685 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1686
1687 @kindex --sort-section=name
1688 @item --sort-section=name
1689 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1690 patterns in the linker script.
1691
1692 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1693 @item --sort-section=alignment
1694 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1695 patterns in the linker script.
1696
1697 @kindex --split-by-file
1698 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1699 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1700 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1701 size of 1 if not given.
1702
1703 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1704 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1705 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1706 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1707 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1708 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1709 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1710 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1711 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1712 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1713 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1714 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1715
1716 @kindex --stats
1717 @item --stats
1718 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1719 as execution time and memory usage.
1720
1721 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1722 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1723 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1724 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1725 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1726
1727 @kindex --traditional-format
1728 @cindex traditional format
1729 @item --traditional-format
1730 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1731 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1732 use the traditional format instead.
1733
1734 @cindex dbx
1735 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1736 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1737 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1738 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1739 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1740 combine duplicate entries.
1741
1742 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1743 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1744 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1745 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1746 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1747 line.
1748 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1749 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1750 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1751 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1752 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1753
1754 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1755 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1756 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1757 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1758 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1759 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1760 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1761 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1762 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1763
1764 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1765 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1766 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1767 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1768 of the first byte of the text segment.
1769
1770 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1771 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1772 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1773 values for @samp{method}:
1774
1775 @table @samp
1776 @item ignore-all
1777 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1778
1779 @item report-all
1780 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1781
1782 @item ignore-in-object-files
1783 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1784 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1785
1786 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1787 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1788 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1789 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1790 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1791 command line.
1792 @end table
1793
1794 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1795 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1796
1797 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1798 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1799 can change this to a warning.
1800
1801 @kindex --verbose
1802 @cindex verbose
1803 @item --dll-verbose
1804 @itemx --verbose
1805 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1806 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1807 the linker script being used by the linker.
1808
1809 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1810 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1811 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1812 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1813 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1814 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1815 is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1816 @xref{VERSION}.
1817
1818 @kindex --warn-common
1819 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1820 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1821 @item --warn-common
1822 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1823 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1824 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1825 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1826 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1827 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1828
1829 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1830
1831 @table @samp
1832 @item int i = 1;
1833 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1834 file.
1835
1836 @item extern int i;
1837 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1838 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1839 variable somewhere.
1840
1841 @item int i;
1842 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1843 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1844 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1845 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1846 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1847 a definition of the same variable.
1848 @end table
1849
1850 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1851 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1852 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1853 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1854 a common symbol.
1855
1856 @enumerate
1857 @item
1858 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1859 definition for the symbol.
1860 @smallexample
1861 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1862 overridden by definition
1863 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1864 @end smallexample
1865
1866 @item
1867 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1868 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1869 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1870 @smallexample
1871 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1872 overriding common
1873 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1874 @end smallexample
1875
1876 @item
1877 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1878 @smallexample
1879 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1880 of `@var{symbol}'
1881 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1882 @end smallexample
1883
1884 @item
1885 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1886 @smallexample
1887 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1888 overridden by larger common
1889 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1890 @end smallexample
1891
1892 @item
1893 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1894 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1895 encountered in a different order.
1896 @smallexample
1897 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1898 overriding smaller common
1899 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1900 @end smallexample
1901 @end enumerate
1902
1903 @kindex --warn-constructors
1904 @item --warn-constructors
1905 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1906 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1907 detect the use of global constructors.
1908
1909 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1910 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1911 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1912 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1913 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1914 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1915 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1916 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1917 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1918 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1919 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1920 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1921 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1922
1923 @kindex --warn-once
1924 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1925 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1926 @item --warn-once
1927 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1928 which refers to it.
1929
1930 @kindex --warn-section-align
1931 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1932 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1933 @item --warn-section-align
1934 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1935 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1936 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1937 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1938 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1939
1940 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1941 @item --warn-shared-textrel
1942 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1943
1944 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
1945 @item --warn-alternate-em
1946 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1947
1948 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1949 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1950 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1951 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1952 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1953
1954 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1955 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
1956 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1957 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1958
1959 @kindex --whole-archive
1960 @cindex including an entire archive
1961 @item --whole-archive
1962 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1963 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
1964 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1965 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1966 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1967 library. This option may be used more than once.
1968
1969 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1970 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1971 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
1972 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1973 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1974
1975 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1976 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
1977 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1978 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1979 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1980 @var{symbol}.
1981
1982 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1983 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1984 wishes to call the system function, it should call
1985 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1986
1987 Here is a trivial example:
1988
1989 @smallexample
1990 void *
1991 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
1992 @{
1993 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
1994 return __real_malloc (c);
1995 @}
1996 @end smallexample
1997
1998 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
1999 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2000 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2001 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2002
2003 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2004 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2005 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2006 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2007 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2008
2009 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2010 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2011 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2012 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2013
2014 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2015 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2016 @item --enable-new-dtags
2017 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2018 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2019 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2020 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2021 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2022 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2023 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2024
2025 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2026 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2027 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2028 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2029 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2030 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2031 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2032
2033 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2034 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2035 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2036 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2037 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2038 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2039 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2040
2041 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2042 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2043 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2044 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2045 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2046 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2047
2048 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2049 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2050 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2051 has been used.
2052
2053 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2054 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2055
2056 @kindex --build-id
2057 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2058 @item --build-id
2059 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2060 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2061 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2062 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2063 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2064 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2065 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2066 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2067 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2068 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2069 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2070
2071 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2072 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2073 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2074 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2075 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2076 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2077
2078 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2079 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2080 @end table
2081
2082 @c man end
2083
2084 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2085
2086 @c man begin OPTIONS
2087
2088 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2089 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2090 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2091 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2092 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2093 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2094 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2095 object file).
2096
2097 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2098 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2099 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2100 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2101
2102 @table @gcctabopt
2103
2104 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2105 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2106 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2107 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2108 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2109
2110 @kindex --base-file
2111 @item --base-file @var{file}
2112 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2113 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2114 @file{dlltool}.
2115 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2116
2117 @kindex --dll
2118 @item --dll
2119 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2120 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2121 file.
2122 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2123
2124 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2125 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2126 @item --enable-long-section-names
2127 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2128 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2129 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2130 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2131 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2132 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2133 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2134 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2135 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2136 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2137 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2138 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2139 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2140 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2141 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2142 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2143 image and not stripping symbols.
2144 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2145
2146 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2147 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2148 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2149 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2150 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2151 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2152 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2153 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2154 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2155 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2156 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2157 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2158 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2159 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2160 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2161 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2162 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2163 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2164
2165 @cindex DLLs, creating
2166 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2167 @item --export-all-symbols
2168 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2169 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2170 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2171 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2172 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2173 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2174 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2175 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2176 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2177 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2178 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2179 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2180 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2181 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2182 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2183 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2184 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2185 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2186 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2187 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2188 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2189 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2190 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2191
2192 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2193 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2194 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2195 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2196 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2197
2198 @kindex --file-alignment
2199 @item --file-alignment
2200 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2201 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2202 512.
2203 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2204
2205 @cindex heap size
2206 @kindex --heap
2207 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2208 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2209 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2210 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2211 committed.
2212 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2213
2214 @cindex image base
2215 @kindex --image-base
2216 @item --image-base @var{value}
2217 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2218 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2219 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2220 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2221 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2222 for dlls.
2223 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2224
2225 @kindex --kill-at
2226 @item --kill-at
2227 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2228 symbols before they are exported.
2229 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2230
2231 @kindex --large-address-aware
2232 @item --large-address-aware
2233 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2234 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2235 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2236 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2237 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2238 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2239
2240 @kindex --major-image-version
2241 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2242 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2243 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2244
2245 @kindex --major-os-version
2246 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2247 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2248 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2249
2250 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2251 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2252 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2253 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2254
2255 @kindex --minor-image-version
2256 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2257 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2258 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2259
2260 @kindex --minor-os-version
2261 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2262 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2263 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2264
2265 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2266 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2267 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2268 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2269
2270 @cindex DEF files, creating
2271 @cindex DLLs, creating
2272 @kindex --output-def
2273 @item --output-def @var{file}
2274 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2275 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2276 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2277 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2278 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2279 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2280
2281 @cindex DLLs, creating
2282 @kindex --out-implib
2283 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2284 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2285 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2286 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2287 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2288 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2289 creation step.
2290 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2291
2292 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2293 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2294 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2295 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2296 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2297 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2298 avoided.
2299 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2300
2301 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2302 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2303 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2304 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2305 default.
2306 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2307
2308 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2309 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2310 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2311 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2312 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2313 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2314 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2315 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2316 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2317 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2318
2319 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2320 @item --enable-auto-import
2321 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2322 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2323 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2324 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2325 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2326 specification published by Microsoft.
2327
2328 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2329 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2330 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2331 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2332 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2333
2334 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2335 see this message:
2336
2337 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2338 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2339
2340 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2341 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2342 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2343 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2344 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2345 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2346 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2347 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2348 the warning, and exit.
2349
2350 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2351 data type of the exported variable:
2352
2353 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2354 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2355 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2356
2357 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2358 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2359 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2360 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2361
2362 @example
2363 extern type extern_array[];
2364 extern_array[1] -->
2365 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2366 @end example
2367
2368 or
2369
2370 @example
2371 extern type extern_array[];
2372 extern_array[1] -->
2373 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2374 @end example
2375
2376 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2377 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2378
2379 @example
2380 extern struct s extern_struct;
2381 extern_struct.field -->
2382 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2383 @end example
2384
2385 or
2386
2387 @example
2388 extern long long extern_ll;
2389 extern_ll -->
2390 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2391 @end example
2392
2393 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2394 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2395 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2396 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2397 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2398 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2399 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2400 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2401
2402 Original:
2403 @example
2404 --foo.h
2405 extern int arr[];
2406 --foo.c
2407 #include "foo.h"
2408 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2409 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2410 @}
2411 @end example
2412
2413 Solution 1:
2414 @example
2415 --foo.h
2416 extern int arr[];
2417 --foo.c
2418 #include "foo.h"
2419 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2420 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2421 volatile int *parr = arr;
2422 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2423 @}
2424 @end example
2425
2426 Solution 2:
2427 @example
2428 --foo.h
2429 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2430 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2431 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2432 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2433 #else
2434 #define FOO_IMPORT
2435 #endif
2436 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2437 --foo.c
2438 #include "foo.h"
2439 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2440 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2441 @}
2442 @end example
2443
2444 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2445 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2446 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2447 functions).
2448 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2449
2450 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2451 @item --disable-auto-import
2452 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2453 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2454 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2455
2456 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2457 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2458 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2459 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2460 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2461 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2462 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2463
2464 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2465 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2466 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2467 DLLs. This is the default.
2468 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2469
2470 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2471 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2472 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2473 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2474
2475 @kindex --section-alignment
2476 @item --section-alignment
2477 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2478 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2479 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2480
2481 @cindex stack size
2482 @kindex --stack
2483 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2484 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2485 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2486 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2487 committed.
2488 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2489
2490 @kindex --subsystem
2491 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2492 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2493 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2494 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2495 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2496 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2497 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2498 @var{which}.
2499 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2500
2501 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2502 of the PE file header:
2503 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2504
2505 @kindex --dynamicbase
2506 @item --dynamicbase
2507 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2508 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2509 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2510
2511 @kindex --forceinteg
2512 @item --forceinteg
2513 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2514
2515 @kindex --nxcompat
2516 @item --nxcompat
2517 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2518 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2519
2520 @kindex --no-isolation
2521 @item --no-isolation
2522 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2523
2524 @kindex --no-seh
2525 @item --no-seh
2526 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2527 this image.
2528
2529 @kindex --no-bind
2530 @item --no-bind
2531 Do not bind this image.
2532
2533 @kindex --wdmdriver
2534 @item --wdmdriver
2535 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2536
2537 @kindex --tsaware
2538 @item --tsaware
2539 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2540
2541 @end table
2542
2543 @c man end
2544
2545 @ifset M68HC11
2546 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2547
2548 @c man begin OPTIONS
2549
2550 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2551 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2552
2553 @table @gcctabopt
2554
2555 @kindex --no-trampoline
2556 @item --no-trampoline
2557 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2558 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2559 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2560
2561 @kindex --bank-window
2562 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2563 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2564 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2565 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2566 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2567
2568 @end table
2569
2570 @c man end
2571 @end ifset
2572
2573 @ifset M68K
2574 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2575
2576 @c man begin OPTIONS
2577
2578 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2579 when linking for 68K targets.
2580
2581 @table @gcctabopt
2582
2583 @kindex --got
2584 @item --got=@var{type}
2585 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2586 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2587 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2588 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2589
2590 @end table
2591
2592 @c man end
2593 @end ifset
2594
2595 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2596 @node Environment
2597 @section Environment Variables
2598
2599 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2600
2601 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2602 @ifclear SingleFormat
2603 @code{GNUTARGET},
2604 @end ifclear
2605 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2606
2607 @ifclear SingleFormat
2608 @kindex GNUTARGET
2609 @cindex default input format
2610 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2611 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2612 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2613 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2614 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2615 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2616 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2617 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2618 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2619 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2620 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2621 @end ifclear
2622
2623 @kindex LDEMULATION
2624 @cindex default emulation
2625 @cindex emulation, default
2626 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2627 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2628 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2629 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2630 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2631 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2632 linker was configured.
2633
2634 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2635 @cindex demangling, default
2636 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2637 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2638 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2639 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2640 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2641 options.
2642
2643 @c man end
2644 @end ifset
2645
2646 @node Scripts
2647 @chapter Linker Scripts
2648
2649 @cindex scripts
2650 @cindex linker scripts
2651 @cindex command files
2652 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2653 written in the linker command language.
2654
2655 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2656 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2657 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2658 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2659 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2660 described below.
2661
2662 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2663 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2664 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2665 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2666 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2667
2668 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2669 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2670 default linker script.
2671
2672 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2673 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2674 Linker Scripts}.
2675
2676 @menu
2677 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2678 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2679 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2680 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2681 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2682 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2683 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2684 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2685 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2686 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2687 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2688 @end menu
2689
2690 @node Basic Script Concepts
2691 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2692 @cindex linker script concepts
2693 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2694 describe the linker script language.
2695
2696 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2697 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2698 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2699 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2700 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2701 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2702 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2703 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2704
2705 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2706 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2707 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2708 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2709 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2710 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2711 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2712 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2713 of debugging information.
2714
2715 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2716 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2717 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2718 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2719 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2720 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2721 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2722 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2723 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2724 RAM address would be the VMA.
2725
2726 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2727 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2728
2729 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2730 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2731 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2732 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2733 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2734 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2735 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2736
2737 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2738 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2739 option.
2740
2741 @node Script Format
2742 @section Linker Script Format
2743 @cindex linker script format
2744 Linker scripts are text files.
2745
2746 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2747 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2748 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2749 generally ignored.
2750
2751 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2752 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2753 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2754 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2755 file name.
2756
2757 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2758 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2759 to whitespace.
2760
2761 @node Simple Example
2762 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2763 @cindex linker script example
2764 @cindex example of linker script
2765 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2766
2767 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2768 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2769 memory layout of the output file.
2770
2771 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2772 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2773 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2774 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2775 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2776 your input files.
2777
2778 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2779 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2780 linker script which will do that:
2781 @smallexample
2782 SECTIONS
2783 @{
2784 . = 0x10000;
2785 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2786 . = 0x8000000;
2787 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2788 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2789 @}
2790 @end smallexample
2791
2792 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2793 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2794 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2795
2796 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2797 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2798 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2799 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2800 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2801 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2802 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2803
2804 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2805 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2806 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2807 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2808 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2809 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2810
2811 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2812 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2813 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2814
2815 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2816 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2817 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2818 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2819 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2820 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2821 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2822
2823 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2824 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2825 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2826 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2827 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2828 sections.
2829
2830 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2831
2832 @node Simple Commands
2833 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2834 @cindex linker script simple commands
2835 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2836
2837 @menu
2838 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2839 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2840 @ifclear SingleFormat
2841 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2842 @end ifclear
2843
2844 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2845 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2846 @end menu
2847
2848 @node Entry Point
2849 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2850 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2851 @cindex start of execution
2852 @cindex first instruction
2853 @cindex entry point
2854 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2855 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2856 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2857 @smallexample
2858 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2859 @end smallexample
2860
2861 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2862 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2863 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2864 @itemize @bullet
2865 @item
2866 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2867 @item
2868 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2869 @item
2870 the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
2871 @item
2872 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2873 @item
2874 The address @code{0}.
2875 @end itemize
2876
2877 @node File Commands
2878 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2879 @cindex linker script file commands
2880 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2881
2882 @table @code
2883 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2884 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2885 @cindex including a linker script
2886 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2887 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2888 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
2889 10 levels deep.
2890
2891 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2892 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2893
2894 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2895 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2896 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2897 @cindex input files in linker scripts
2898 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
2899 @cindex linker script input object files
2900 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2901 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2902
2903 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2904 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2905 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2906
2907 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2908 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2909
2910 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2911 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2912 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2913 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2914 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2915 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2916 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2917
2918 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
2919 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2920 @samp{-l}.
2921
2922 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2923 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2924 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2925
2926 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2927 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2928 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2929 @cindex grouping input files
2930 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2931 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2932 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2933 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2934
2935 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2936 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2937 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2938 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2939 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2940 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2941 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2942 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2943 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2944 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2945 setting afterwards.
2946
2947 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2948 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2949 @cindex output file name in linker script
2950 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2951 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2952 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2953 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2954 precedence.
2955
2956 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2957 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2958
2959 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2960 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2961 @cindex library search path in linker script
2962 @cindex archive search path in linker script
2963 @cindex search path in linker script
2964 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
2965 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
2966 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2967 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2968 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2969 the command line option are searched first.
2970
2971 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2972 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2973 @cindex first input file
2974 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2975 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2976 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2977 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2978 first file.
2979 @end table
2980
2981 @ifclear SingleFormat
2982 @node Format Commands
2983 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
2984 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2985
2986 @table @code
2987 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2988 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2989 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2990 @cindex output file format in linker script
2991 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2992 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
2993 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2994 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2995 line option takes precedence.
2996
2997 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2998 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2999 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3000 desired endianness.
3001
3002 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3003 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3004 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3005 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3006
3007 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3008 command:
3009 @smallexample
3010 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3011 @end smallexample
3012 This says that the default format for the output file is
3013 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3014 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3015 format.
3016
3017 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3018 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3019 @cindex input file format in linker script
3020 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3021 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3022 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3023 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3024 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3025 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3026 @end table
3027 @end ifclear
3028
3029 @node REGION_ALIAS
3030 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3031 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3032 @cindex region alias
3033 @cindex region names
3034
3035 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3036 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3037
3038 @smallexample
3039 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3040 @end smallexample
3041
3042 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3043 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3044 to memory regions. An example follows.
3045
3046 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3047 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3048 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3049 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3050 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3051 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3052 sections:
3053
3054 @itemize @bullet
3055 @item
3056 @code{.text} program code;
3057 @item
3058 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3059 @item
3060 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3061 @item
3062 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3063 @end itemize
3064
3065 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3066 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3067 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3068 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3069 @code{C}:
3070 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3071 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3072 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3073 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3074 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3075 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3076 @end multitable
3077 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3078 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3079 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3080 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3081
3082 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3083 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3084 memory layout:
3085 @smallexample
3086 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3087
3088 SECTIONS
3089 @{
3090 .text :
3091 @{
3092 *(.text)
3093 @} > REGION_TEXT
3094 .rodata :
3095 @{
3096 *(.rodata)
3097 rodata_end = .;
3098 @} > REGION_RODATA
3099 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3100 @{
3101 data_start = .;
3102 *(.data)
3103 @} > REGION_DATA
3104 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3105 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3106 .bss :
3107 @{
3108 *(.bss)
3109 @} > REGION_BSS
3110 @}
3111 @end smallexample
3112
3113 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3114 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3115 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3116 @table @code
3117 @item A
3118 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3119 @smallexample
3120 MEMORY
3121 @{
3122 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3123 @}
3124
3125 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3126 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3127 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3128 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3129 @end smallexample
3130 @item B
3131 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3132 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3133 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3134 @smallexample
3135 MEMORY
3136 @{
3137 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3138 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3139 @}
3140
3141 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3142 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3143 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3144 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3145 @end smallexample
3146 @item C
3147 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3148 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3149 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3150 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3151 @smallexample
3152 MEMORY
3153 @{
3154 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3155 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3156 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3157 @}
3158
3159 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3160 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3161 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3162 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3163 @end smallexample
3164 @end table
3165
3166 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3167 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3168 necessary:
3169 @smallexample
3170 #include <string.h>
3171
3172 extern char data_start [];
3173 extern char data_size [];
3174 extern char data_load_start [];
3175
3176 void copy_data(void)
3177 @{
3178 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3179 @{
3180 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3181 @}
3182 @}
3183 @end smallexample
3184
3185 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3186 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3187 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3188
3189 @table @code
3190 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3191 @kindex ASSERT
3192 @cindex assertion in linker script
3193 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3194 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3195
3196 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3197 @kindex EXTERN
3198 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3199 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3200 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3201 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3202 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3203 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3204
3205 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3206 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3207 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3208 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3209 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3210 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3211
3212 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3213 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3214 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3215 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3216 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3217 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3218
3219 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3220 @kindex INSERT
3221 @cindex insert user script into default script
3222 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3223 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3224 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3225 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3226 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3227 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3228 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3229 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3230 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3231 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3232 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3233 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3234 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3235
3236 @smallexample
3237 SECTIONS
3238 @{
3239 OVERLAY :
3240 @{
3241 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3242 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3243 @}
3244 @}
3245 INSERT AFTER .text;
3246 @end smallexample
3247
3248 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3249 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3250 @cindex cross references
3251 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3252 references among certain output sections.
3253
3254 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3255 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3256 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3257 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3258 a function defined in the other section.
3259
3260 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3261 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3262 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3263 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3264 names.
3265
3266 @ifclear SingleFormat
3267 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3268 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3269 @cindex machine architecture
3270 @cindex architecture
3271 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3272 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3273 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3274 the @samp{-f} option.
3275 @end ifclear
3276 @end table
3277
3278 @node Assignments
3279 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3280 @cindex assignment in scripts
3281 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3282 @cindex variables, defining
3283 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3284 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3285
3286 @menu
3287 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3288 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3289 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3290 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3291 @end menu
3292
3293 @node Simple Assignments
3294 @subsection Simple Assignments
3295
3296 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3297
3298 @table @code
3299 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3300 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3301 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3302 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3303 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3304 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3305 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3306 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3307 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3308 @end table
3309
3310 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3311 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3312 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3313
3314 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3315 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3316
3317 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3318
3319 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3320
3321 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3322 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3323 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3324
3325 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3326 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3327
3328 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3329 assignments may be used:
3330
3331 @smallexample
3332 floating_point = 0;
3333 SECTIONS
3334 @{
3335 .text :
3336 @{
3337 *(.text)
3338 _etext = .;
3339 @}
3340 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3341 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3342 @}
3343 @end smallexample
3344 @noindent
3345 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3346 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3347 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3348 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3349 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3350
3351 @node PROVIDE
3352 @subsection PROVIDE
3353 @cindex PROVIDE
3354 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3355 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3356 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3357 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3358 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3359 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3360 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3361 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3362
3363 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3364 @smallexample
3365 SECTIONS
3366 @{
3367 .text :
3368 @{
3369 *(.text)
3370 _etext = .;
3371 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3372 @}
3373 @}
3374 @end smallexample
3375
3376 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3377 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3378 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3379 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3380 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3381 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3382
3383 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3384 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3385 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3386 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3387 hidden and won't be exported.
3388
3389 @node Source Code Reference
3390 @subsection Source Code Reference
3391
3392 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3393 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3394 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3395 symbol that does not have a value.
3396
3397 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3398 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3399 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3400 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3401 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3402 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3403 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3404 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3405
3406 @smallexample
3407 extern int foo;
3408 @end smallexample
3409
3410 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3411
3412 @smallexample
3413 _foo = 1000;
3414 @end smallexample
3415
3416 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3417 transformation has taken place.
3418
3419 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3420 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3421 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3422 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3423 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3424 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3425 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3426
3427 @smallexample
3428 int foo = 1000;
3429 @end smallexample
3430
3431 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3432 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3433 number 1000 is initially stored.
3434
3435 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3436 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3437 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3438 So:
3439
3440 @smallexample
3441 foo = 1;
3442 @end smallexample
3443
3444 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3445 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3446 address. Whereas:
3447
3448 @smallexample
3449 int * a = & foo;
3450 @end smallexample
3451
3452 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3453 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3454 the variable @samp{a}.
3455
3456 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3457 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3458 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3459
3460 @smallexample
3461 foo = 1000;
3462 @end smallexample
3463
3464 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3465 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3466 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3467 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3468 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3469
3470 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3471 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3472 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3473 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3474 linker script contains these declarations:
3475
3476 @smallexample
3477 @group
3478 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3479 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3480 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3481 @end group
3482 @end smallexample
3483
3484 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3485
3486 @smallexample
3487 @group
3488 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3489
3490 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3491 @end group
3492 @end smallexample
3493
3494 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3495
3496 @node SECTIONS
3497 @section SECTIONS Command
3498 @kindex SECTIONS
3499 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3500 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3501
3502 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3503 @smallexample
3504 SECTIONS
3505 @{
3506 @var{sections-command}
3507 @var{sections-command}
3508 @dots{}
3509 @}
3510 @end smallexample
3511
3512 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3513
3514 @itemize @bullet
3515 @item
3516 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3517 @item
3518 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3519 @item
3520 an output section description
3521 @item
3522 an overlay description
3523 @end itemize
3524
3525 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3526 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3527 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3528 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3529 the layout of the output file.
3530
3531 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3532 below.
3533
3534 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3535 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3536 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3537 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3538 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3539 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3540
3541 @menu
3542 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3543 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3544 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3545 * Input Section:: Input section description
3546 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3547 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3548 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3549 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3550 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3551 @end menu
3552
3553 @node Output Section Description
3554 @subsection Output Section Description
3555 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3556 @smallexample
3557 @group
3558 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3559 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3560 @{
3561 @var{output-section-command}
3562 @var{output-section-command}
3563 @dots{}
3564 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3565 @end group
3566 @end smallexample
3567
3568 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3569
3570 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3571 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3572 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3573
3574 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3575
3576 @itemize @bullet
3577 @item
3578 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3579 @item
3580 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3581 @item
3582 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3583 @item
3584 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3585 @end itemize
3586
3587 @node Output Section Name
3588 @subsection Output Section Name
3589 @cindex name, section
3590 @cindex section name
3591 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3592 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3593 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3594 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3595 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3596 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3597 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3598 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3599 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3600 commas must be quoted.
3601
3602 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3603 Discarding}.
3604
3605 @node Output Section Address
3606 @subsection Output Section Address
3607 @cindex address, section
3608 @cindex section address
3609 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3610 address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3611 the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3612 based on the current value of the location counter.
3613
3614 If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3615 set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3616 @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3617 current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3618 requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3619 output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3620 within the output section.
3621
3622 For example,
3623 @smallexample
3624 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3625 @end smallexample
3626 @noindent
3627 and
3628 @smallexample
3629 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3630 @end smallexample
3631 @noindent
3632 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3633 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3634 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3635 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3636 section.
3637
3638 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3639 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3640 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3641 do something like this:
3642 @smallexample
3643 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3644 @end smallexample
3645 @noindent
3646 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3647 aligned upward to the specified value.
3648
3649 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3650 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3651 sections are ignored).
3652
3653 @node Input Section
3654 @subsection Input Section Description
3655 @cindex input sections
3656 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3657 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3658
3659 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3660 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3661 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3662 map the input files into your memory layout.
3663
3664 @menu
3665 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3666 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3667 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3668 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3669 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3670 @end menu
3671
3672 @node Input Section Basics
3673 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3674 @cindex input section basics
3675 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3676 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3677
3678 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3679 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3680
3681 The most common input section description is to include all input
3682 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3683 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3684 @smallexample
3685 *(.text)
3686 @end smallexample
3687 @noindent
3688 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3689 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3690 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3691 example:
3692 @smallexample
3693 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3694 @end smallexample
3695 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3696 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3697
3698 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3699 @smallexample
3700 *(.text .rdata)
3701 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3702 @end smallexample
3703 @noindent
3704 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3705 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3706 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3707 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3708 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3709 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3710
3711 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3712 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3713 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3714 @smallexample
3715 data.o(.data)
3716 @end smallexample
3717
3718 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3719 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3720 with no whitespace around the colon.
3721
3722 @table @samp
3723 @item archive:file
3724 matches file within archive
3725 @item archive:
3726 matches the whole archive
3727 @item :file
3728 matches file but not one in an archive
3729 @end table
3730
3731 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3732 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3733 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3734 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3735 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3736 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3737 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3738 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3739 command.
3740
3741 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3742 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3743 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3744 @smallexample
3745 data.o
3746 @end smallexample
3747
3748 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3749 and does not contain any wild card
3750 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3751 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3752 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3753 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3754 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3755 the archive search path.
3756
3757 @node Input Section Wildcards
3758 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3759 @cindex input section wildcards
3760 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3761 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3762 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3763 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3764 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3765
3766 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3767 pattern for the file name.
3768
3769 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3770
3771 @table @samp
3772 @item *
3773 matches any number of characters
3774 @item ?
3775 matches any single character
3776 @item [@var{chars}]
3777 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3778 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3779 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3780 @item \
3781 quotes the following character
3782 @end table
3783
3784 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3785 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3786 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3787 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3788 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3789 a @samp{/} character.
3790
3791 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3792 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3793 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3794
3795 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3796 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3797 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3798 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3799 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3800 @smallexample
3801 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3802 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3803 @end smallexample
3804
3805 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3806 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3807 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3808 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3809 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3810 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3811 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3812
3813 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3814 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3815 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3816 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3817
3818 @cindex SORT
3819 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3820
3821 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3822 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3823
3824 @enumerate
3825 @item
3826 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3827 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3828 sections have the same name.
3829 @item
3830 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3831 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3832 sections have the same alignment.
3833 @item
3834 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3835 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3836 @item
3837 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3838 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3839 @item
3840 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3841 @end enumerate
3842
3843 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3844 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3845 takes precedence over the command line option.
3846
3847 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3848 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3849 treated as nested sorting command.
3850
3851 @enumerate
3852 @item
3853 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3854 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3855 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3856 @item
3857 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3858 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3859 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3860 @end enumerate
3861
3862 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3863 command line option will be ignored.
3864
3865 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3866 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3867 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3868
3869 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3870 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3871 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3872 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3873 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3874 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3875 @smallexample
3876 @group
3877 SECTIONS @{
3878 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3879 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3880 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3881 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3882 @}
3883 @end group
3884 @end smallexample
3885
3886 @node Input Section Common
3887 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
3888 @cindex common symbol placement
3889 @cindex uninitialized data placement
3890 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3891 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3892 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3893 named @samp{COMMON}.
3894
3895 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3896 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3897 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3898 input files are placed in another section.
3899
3900 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3901 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3902 @smallexample
3903 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3904 @end smallexample
3905
3906 @cindex scommon section
3907 @cindex small common symbols
3908 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3909 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3910 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3911 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3912 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3913 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3914 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3915 locations.
3916
3917 @cindex [COMMON]
3918 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3919 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3920 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
3921
3922 @node Input Section Keep
3923 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
3924 @cindex KEEP
3925 @cindex garbage collection
3926 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
3927 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
3928 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3929 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
3930 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
3931
3932 @node Input Section Example
3933 @subsubsection Input Section Example
3934 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3935 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3936 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3937 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3938 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3939 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3940 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3941 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3942 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3943
3944 @smallexample
3945 @group
3946 SECTIONS @{
3947 outputa 0x10000 :
3948 @{
3949 all.o
3950 foo.o (.input1)
3951 @}
3952 @end group
3953 @group
3954 outputb :
3955 @{
3956 foo.o (.input2)
3957 foo1.o (.input1)
3958 @}
3959 @end group
3960 @group
3961 outputc :
3962 @{
3963 *(.input1)
3964 *(.input2)
3965 @}
3966 @}
3967 @end group
3968 @end smallexample
3969
3970 @node Output Section Data
3971 @subsection Output Section Data
3972 @cindex data
3973 @cindex section data
3974 @cindex output section data
3975 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3976 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3977 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3978 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3979 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3980 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3981 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3982 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3983 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3984 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3985 counter.
3986
3987 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3988 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3989 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3990 stored.
3991
3992 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3993 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3994 @smallexample
3995 BYTE(1)
3996 LONG(addr)
3997 @end smallexample
3998
3999 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4000 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4001 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4002 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4003 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4004
4005 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4006 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4007 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4008 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4009 endianness of the first input object file.
4010
4011 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4012 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4013 @smallexample
4014 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4015 @end smallexample
4016 whereas this will work:
4017 @smallexample
4018 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4019 @end smallexample
4020
4021 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4022 @cindex holes, filling
4023 @cindex unspecified memory
4024 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4025 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4026 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4027 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4028 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4029 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4030 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4031 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4032 different parts of an output section.
4033
4034 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4035 value @samp{0x90}:
4036 @smallexample
4037 FILL(0x90909090)
4038 @end smallexample
4039
4040 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4041 section attribute, but it only affects the
4042 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4043 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4044 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4045 expression.
4046
4047 @node Output Section Keywords
4048 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4049 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4050 commands.
4051
4052 @table @code
4053 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4054 @cindex input filename symbols
4055 @cindex filename symbols
4056 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4057 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4058 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4059 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4060 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4061
4062 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4063 normally used for any other object file format.
4064
4065 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4066 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4067 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4068 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4069 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4070 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4071 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4072 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4073 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4074 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4075 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4076 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4077 ignored for other object file formats.
4078
4079 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4080 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4081 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4082 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4083 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4084 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4085 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4086 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4087 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4088 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4089 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4090 @code{exit}.
4091
4092 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4093 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4094 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4095 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4096 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4097 runtime code expects to see.
4098
4099 @smallexample
4100 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4101 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4102 *(.ctors)
4103 LONG(0)
4104 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4105 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4106 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4107 *(.dtors)
4108 LONG(0)
4109 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4110 @end smallexample
4111
4112 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4113 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4114 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4115 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4116 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4117 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4118 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4119 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4120
4121 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4122 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4123 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4124 scripts.
4125
4126 @end table
4127
4128 @node Output Section Discarding
4129 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4130 @cindex discarding sections
4131 @cindex sections, discarding
4132 @cindex removing sections
4133 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4134 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4135 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4136 @smallexample
4137 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4138 @end smallexample
4139 @noindent
4140 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4141 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4142 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4143 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4144
4145 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4146 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4147 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4148 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4149 section is discarded.
4150
4151 @cindex /DISCARD/
4152 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4153 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4154 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4155
4156 @node Output Section Attributes
4157 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4158 @cindex output section attributes
4159 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4160 like this:
4161 @smallexample
4162 @group
4163 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4164 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4165 @{
4166 @var{output-section-command}
4167 @var{output-section-command}
4168 @dots{}
4169 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4170 @end group
4171 @end smallexample
4172 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4173 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4174 remaining section attributes.
4175
4176 @menu
4177 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4178 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4179 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4180 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4181 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4182 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4183 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4184 @end menu
4185
4186 @node Output Section Type
4187 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4188 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4189 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4190
4191 @table @code
4192 @item NOLOAD
4193 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4194 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4195 @item DSECT
4196 @itemx COPY
4197 @itemx INFO
4198 @itemx OVERLAY
4199 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4200 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4201 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4202 section when the program is run.
4203 @end table
4204
4205 @kindex NOLOAD
4206 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4207 @cindex loading, preventing
4208 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4209 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4210 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4211 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4212 need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4213 @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4214 @smallexample
4215 @group
4216 SECTIONS @{
4217 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4218 @dots{}
4219 @}
4220 @end group
4221 @end smallexample
4222
4223 @node Output Section LMA
4224 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4225 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4226 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4227 @cindex load address
4228 @cindex section load address
4229 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4230 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4231 an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4232 Address}).
4233
4234 The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4235 the load address of the section.
4236
4237 Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4238 specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4239 Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4240 linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
4241
4242 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4243 section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4244 VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4245 section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4246 or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4247 to the VMA.
4248 @xref{Output Section Region}.
4249
4250 @cindex ROM initialized data
4251 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4252 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4253 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4254 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4255 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4256 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4257 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4258 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4259 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4260
4261 @smallexample
4262 @group
4263 SECTIONS
4264 @{
4265 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4266 .mdata 0x2000 :
4267 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4268 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4269 .bss 0x3000 :
4270 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4271 @}
4272 @end group
4273 @end smallexample
4274
4275 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4276 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4277 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4278 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4279 script.
4280
4281 @smallexample
4282 @group
4283 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4284 char *src = &_etext;
4285 char *dst = &_data;
4286
4287 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4288 while (dst < &_edata) @{
4289 *dst++ = *src++;
4290 @}
4291
4292 /* Zero bss */
4293 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4294 *dst = 0;
4295 @end group
4296 @end smallexample
4297
4298 @node Forced Output Alignment
4299 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4300 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4301 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4302 @cindex output section alignment
4303 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4304
4305 @node Forced Input Alignment
4306 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4307 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4308 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4309 @cindex input section alignment
4310 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4311 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4312 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4313
4314 @node Output Section Region
4315 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4316 @kindex >@var{region}
4317 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4318 @cindex memory regions and sections
4319 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4320 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4321
4322 Here is a simple example:
4323 @smallexample
4324 @group
4325 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4326 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4327 @end group
4328 @end smallexample
4329
4330 @node Output Section Phdr
4331 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4332 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4333 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4334 @cindex program headers and sections
4335 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4336 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4337 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4338 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4339 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4340 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4341
4342 Here is a simple example:
4343 @smallexample
4344 @group
4345 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4346 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4347 @end group
4348 @end smallexample
4349
4350 @node Output Section Fill
4351 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4352 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4353 @cindex section fill pattern
4354 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4355 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4356 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4357 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4358 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4359 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4360 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4361 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4362 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4363 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4364 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4365 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4366 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4367
4368 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4369 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4370
4371 Here is a simple example:
4372 @smallexample
4373 @group
4374 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4375 @end group
4376 @end smallexample
4377
4378 @node Overlay Description
4379 @subsection Overlay Description
4380 @kindex OVERLAY
4381 @cindex overlays
4382 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4383 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4384 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4385 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4386 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4387 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4388 than another.
4389
4390 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4391 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4392 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4393 command is as follows:
4394 @smallexample
4395 @group
4396 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4397 @{
4398 @var{secname1}
4399 @{
4400 @var{output-section-command}
4401 @var{output-section-command}
4402 @dots{}
4403 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4404 @var{secname2}
4405 @{
4406 @var{output-section-command}
4407 @var{output-section-command}
4408 @dots{}
4409 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4410 @dots{}
4411 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4412 @end group
4413 @end smallexample
4414
4415 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4416 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4417 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4418 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4419 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4420 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4421
4422 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4423 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4424 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4425 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4426 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4427 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4428
4429 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4430 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4431 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4432 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4433 NOCROSSREFS}.
4434
4435 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4436 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4437 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4438 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4439 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4440 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4441 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4442
4443 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4444 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4445
4446 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4447 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4448 @smallexample
4449 @group
4450 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4451 @{
4452 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4453 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4454 @}
4455 @end group
4456 @end smallexample
4457 @noindent
4458 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4459 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4460 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4461 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4462 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4463 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4464
4465 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4466 like the following.
4467
4468 @smallexample
4469 @group
4470 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4471 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4472 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4473 @end group
4474 @end smallexample
4475
4476 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4477 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4478 example could have been written identically as follows.
4479
4480 @smallexample
4481 @group
4482 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4483 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4484 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4485 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4486 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4487 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4488 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4489 @end group
4490 @end smallexample
4491
4492 @node MEMORY
4493 @section MEMORY Command
4494 @kindex MEMORY
4495 @cindex memory regions
4496 @cindex regions of memory
4497 @cindex allocating memory
4498 @cindex discontinuous memory
4499 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4500 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4501
4502 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4503 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4504 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4505 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4506 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4507 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4508 around to fit into the available regions.
4509
4510 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4511 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4512 you wish. The syntax is:
4513 @smallexample
4514 @group
4515 MEMORY
4516 @{
4517 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4518 @dots{}
4519 @}
4520 @end group
4521 @end smallexample
4522
4523 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4524 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4525 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4526 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4527 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4528 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4529 command.
4530
4531 @cindex memory region attributes
4532 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4533 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4534 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4535 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4536 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4537 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4538 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4539
4540 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4541 @table @samp
4542 @item R
4543 Read-only section
4544 @item W
4545 Read/write section
4546 @item X
4547 Executable section
4548 @item A
4549 Allocatable section
4550 @item I
4551 Initialized section
4552 @item L
4553 Same as @samp{I}
4554 @item !
4555 Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4556 @end table
4557
4558 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4559 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4560 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4561 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4562 attributes.
4563
4564 @kindex ORIGIN =
4565 @kindex o =
4566 @kindex org =
4567 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4568 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4569 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4570 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4571 @code{ORG}).
4572
4573 @kindex LENGTH =
4574 @kindex len =
4575 @kindex l =
4576 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4577 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4578 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4579 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4580
4581 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4582 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4583 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4584 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4585 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4586 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4587 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4588 region.
4589
4590 @smallexample
4591 @group
4592 MEMORY
4593 @{
4594 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4595 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4596 @}
4597 @end group
4598 @end smallexample
4599
4600 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4601 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4602 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4603 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4604 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4605 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4606 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4607 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4608 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4609
4610 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4611 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4612 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4613
4614 @smallexample
4615 @group
4616 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4617 @end group
4618 @end smallexample
4619
4620 @node PHDRS
4621 @section PHDRS Command
4622 @kindex PHDRS
4623 @cindex program headers
4624 @cindex ELF program headers
4625 @cindex program segments
4626 @cindex segments, ELF
4627 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4628 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4629 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4630 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4631
4632 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4633 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4634 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4635 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4636 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4637
4638 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4639 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4640 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4641 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4642 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4643
4644 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4645 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4646 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4647
4648 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4649 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4650
4651 @smallexample
4652 @group
4653 PHDRS
4654 @{
4655 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4656 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4657 @}
4658 @end group
4659 @end smallexample
4660
4661 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4662 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4663 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4664 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4665 must have a distinct name.
4666
4667 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4668 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4669 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4670 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4671 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4672 Section Phdr}.
4673
4674 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4675 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4676 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4677 contain the section.
4678
4679 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4680 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4681 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4682 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4683 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4684 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4685 segment at all.
4686
4687 @kindex FILEHDR
4688 @kindex PHDRS
4689 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4690 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4691 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4692 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4693 include the ELF program headers themselves.
4694
4695 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4696 value of the keyword.
4697
4698 @table @asis
4699 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4700 Indicates an unused program header.
4701
4702 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4703 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4704 the file.
4705
4706 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4707 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4708
4709 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4710 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4711 found.
4712
4713 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4714 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4715
4716 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4717 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4718 ABI.
4719
4720 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4721 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4722
4723 @item @var{expression}
4724 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4725 be used for types not defined above.
4726 @end table
4727
4728 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4729 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4730 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4731 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4732 output section attribute.
4733
4734 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4735 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4736 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4737 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4738 header.
4739
4740 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4741 headers used on a native ELF system.
4742
4743 @example
4744 @group
4745 PHDRS
4746 @{
4747 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4748 interp PT_INTERP ;
4749 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4750 data PT_LOAD ;
4751 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4752 @}
4753
4754 SECTIONS
4755 @{
4756 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4757 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4758 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4759 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4760 @dots{}
4761 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4762 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4763 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4764 @dots{}
4765 @}
4766 @end group
4767 @end example
4768
4769 @node VERSION
4770 @section VERSION Command
4771 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4772 @cindex symbol versions
4773 @cindex version script
4774 @cindex versions of symbols
4775 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4776 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4777 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4778 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4779 shared library.
4780
4781 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4782 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4783 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4784
4785 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4786 @smallexample
4787 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4788 @end smallexample
4789
4790 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4791 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4792 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4793 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4794 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4795 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4796 library.
4797
4798 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4799 examples.
4800
4801 @smallexample
4802 VERS_1.1 @{
4803 global:
4804 foo1;
4805 local:
4806 old*;
4807 original*;
4808 new*;
4809 @};
4810
4811 VERS_1.2 @{
4812 foo2;
4813 @} VERS_1.1;
4814
4815 VERS_2.0 @{
4816 bar1; bar2;
4817 extern "C++" @{
4818 ns::*;
4819 "int f(int, double)";
4820 @}
4821 @} VERS_1.2;
4822 @end smallexample
4823
4824 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4825 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4826 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4827 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
4828 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4829 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4830 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4831 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
4832 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4833 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4834
4835 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4836 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4837 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4838
4839 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4840 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4841 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4842
4843 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4844 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4845 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
4846 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
4847 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4848 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4849 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4850 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4851 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4852
4853 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4854 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4855 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4856 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4857
4858 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
4859 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4860 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4861 won't.
4862
4863 @smallexample
4864 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
4865 @end smallexample
4866
4867 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4868 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4869 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4870 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4871 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4872 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4873 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4874 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4875 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4876 search for each symbol reference.
4877
4878 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4879 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4880 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4881 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4882 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4883 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4884 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4885 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4886 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4887
4888 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4889 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4890 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4891 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4892 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4893 @smallexample
4894 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4895 @end smallexample
4896 @noindent
4897 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4898 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4899 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
4900 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4901 takes precedence over a version script.
4902
4903 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4904 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4905 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4906 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4907 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4908
4909 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4910 source file. Here is an example:
4911
4912 @smallexample
4913 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4914 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4915 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4916 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4917 @end smallexample
4918
4919 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4920 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4921 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4922 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4923
4924 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4925 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4926 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4927 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4928 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4929 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4930
4931 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4932 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
4933 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
4934 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4935
4936 You can also specify the language in the version script:
4937
4938 @smallexample
4939 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4940 @end smallexample
4941
4942 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
4943 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4944 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4945 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4946
4947 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4948 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4949 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4950 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4951 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4952 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4953 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4954 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4955 expect when you upgrade.
4956
4957 @node Expressions
4958 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4959 @cindex expressions
4960 @cindex arithmetic
4961 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4962 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4963 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4964 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4965
4966 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4967
4968 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4969 expressions.
4970
4971 @menu
4972 * Constants:: Constants
4973 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
4974 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
4975 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4976 * Operators:: Operators
4977 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
4978 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4979 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4980 @end menu
4981
4982 @node Constants
4983 @subsection Constants
4984 @cindex integer notation
4985 @cindex constants in linker scripts
4986 All constants are integers.
4987
4988 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4989 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4990 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4991 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4992 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4993 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
4994
4995 @cindex scaled integers
4996 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
4997 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
4998 @cindex suffixes for integers
4999 @cindex integer suffixes
5000 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5001 constant by
5002 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5003 @ifnottex
5004 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5005 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5006 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5007 @end ifnottex
5008 @tex
5009 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5010 @end tex
5011 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5012 respectively. For example, the following
5013 all refer to the same quantity:
5014
5015 @smallexample
5016 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5017 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5018 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5019 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5020 @end smallexample
5021
5022 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5023 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5024
5025 @node Symbols
5026 @subsection Symbol Names
5027 @cindex symbol names
5028 @cindex names
5029 @cindex quoted symbol names
5030 @kindex "
5031 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5032 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5033 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5034 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5035 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5036 @smallexample
5037 "SECTION" = 9;
5038 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5039 @end smallexample
5040
5041 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5042 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5043 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5044
5045 @node Orphan Sections
5046 @subsection Orphan Sections
5047 @cindex orphan
5048 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5049 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5050 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5051 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5052 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5053 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5054 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5055 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5056 at the end of the file.
5057
5058 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5059 well as section flag.
5060
5061 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5062 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5063 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5064 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5065 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5066 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5067 character.
5068
5069 @node Location Counter
5070 @subsection The Location Counter
5071 @kindex .
5072 @cindex dot
5073 @cindex location counter
5074 @cindex current output location
5075 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5076 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5077 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5078 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5079 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5080
5081 @cindex holes
5082 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5083 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5084 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5085 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5086 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5087
5088 @smallexample
5089 SECTIONS
5090 @{
5091 output :
5092 @{
5093 file1(.text)
5094 . = . + 1000;
5095 file2(.text)
5096 . += 1000;
5097 file3(.text)
5098 @} = 0x12345678;
5099 @}
5100 @end smallexample
5101 @noindent
5102 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5103 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5104 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5105 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5106 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5107 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5108
5109 @cindex dot inside sections
5110 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5111 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5112 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5113 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5114 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5115 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5116
5117 @smallexample
5118 SECTIONS
5119 @{
5120 . = 0x100
5121 .text: @{
5122 *(.text)
5123 . = 0x200
5124 @}
5125 . = 0x500
5126 .data: @{
5127 *(.data)
5128 . += 0x600
5129 @}
5130 @}
5131 @end smallexample
5132
5133 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5134 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5135 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5136 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5137 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5138 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5139 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5140 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5141
5142 @cindex dot outside sections
5143 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5144 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5145 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5146
5147 @smallexample
5148 SECTIONS
5149 @{
5150 start_of_text = . ;
5151 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5152 end_of_text = . ;
5153
5154 start_of_data = . ;
5155 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5156 end_of_data = . ;
5157 @}
5158 @end smallexample
5159
5160 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5161 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5162 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5163 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5164 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5165 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5166 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5167 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5168 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5169 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5170 as follows:
5171
5172 @smallexample
5173 SECTIONS
5174 @{
5175 start_of_text = . ;
5176 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5177 end_of_text = . ;
5178
5179 start_of_data = . ;
5180 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5181 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5182 end_of_data = . ;
5183 @}
5184 @end smallexample
5185
5186 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5187 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5188 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5189 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5190 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5191 section. So you could write:
5192
5193 @smallexample
5194 SECTIONS
5195 @{
5196 start_of_text = . ;
5197 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5198 end_of_text = . ;
5199
5200 . = . ;
5201 start_of_data = . ;
5202 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5203 end_of_data = . ;
5204 @}
5205 @end smallexample
5206
5207 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5208 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5209
5210 @need 2000
5211 @node Operators
5212 @subsection Operators
5213 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5214 @cindex arithmetic operators
5215 @cindex precedence in expressions
5216 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5217 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5218 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5219 @ifnottex
5220 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5221 @smallexample
5222 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5223 (highest)
5224 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5225 2 left * / %
5226 3 left + -
5227 4 left >> <<
5228 5 left == != > < <= >=
5229 6 left &
5230 7 left |
5231 8 left &&
5232 9 left ||
5233 10 right ? :
5234 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5235 (lowest)
5236 @end smallexample
5237 Notes:
5238 (1) Prefix operators
5239 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5240 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5241 @end ifnottex
5242 @tex
5243 \vskip \baselineskip
5244 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5245 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5246 \hrule
5247 \halign
5248 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5249 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5250 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5251 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5252 \noalign{\hrule}
5253 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5254 &highest&&&&&\cr
5255 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5256 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5257 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5258 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5259 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5260 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5261 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5262 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5263 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5264 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5265 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5266 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5267 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5268 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5269 \hrule}
5270 @end tex
5271 @iftex
5272 {
5273 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5274 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5275 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5276 }
5277 @end iftex
5278 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5279
5280 @node Evaluation
5281 @subsection Evaluation
5282 @cindex lazy evaluation
5283 @cindex expression evaluation order
5284 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5285 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5286
5287 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5288 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5289 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5290 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5291
5292 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5293 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5294 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5295 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5296
5297 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5298 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5299 allocation.
5300
5301 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5302 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5303
5304 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5305 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5306 following
5307 @smallexample
5308 @group
5309 SECTIONS
5310 @{
5311 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5312 @{ *(.text) @}
5313 @}
5314 @end group
5315 @end smallexample
5316 @noindent
5317 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5318 address}.
5319
5320 @node Expression Section
5321 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5322 @cindex expression sections
5323 @cindex absolute expressions
5324 @cindex relative expressions
5325 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5326 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5327 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5328 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5329 or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5330 fixed offset from the base of a section.
5331
5332 The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5333 whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5334 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5335 section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5336
5337 A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5338 relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5339 further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5340 section will be the section of the relative expression.
5341
5342 A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5343 through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5344 will not have any particular associated section.
5345
5346 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5347 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5348 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5349 section @samp{.data}:
5350 @smallexample
5351 SECTIONS
5352 @{
5353 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5354 @}
5355 @end smallexample
5356 @noindent
5357 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5358 @samp{.data} section.
5359
5360 @node Builtin Functions
5361 @subsection Builtin Functions
5362 @cindex functions in expressions
5363 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5364 use in linker script expressions.
5365
5366 @table @code
5367 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5368 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5369 @cindex expression, absolute
5370 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5371 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5372 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5373 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5374
5375 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5376 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5377 @cindex section address in expression
5378 Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5379 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5380 the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5381 identical values:
5382 @smallexample
5383 @group
5384 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5385 .output1 :
5386 @{
5387 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5388 @dots{}
5389 @}
5390 .output :
5391 @{
5392 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5393 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5394 @}
5395 @dots{} @}
5396 @end group
5397 @end smallexample
5398
5399 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5400 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5401 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5402 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5403 @cindex round up location counter
5404 @cindex align location counter
5405 @cindex round up expression
5406 @cindex align expression
5407 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5408 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5409 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5410 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5411 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5412 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5413
5414 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5415 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5416 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5417 input sections:
5418 @smallexample
5419 @group
5420 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5421 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5422 *(.data)
5423 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5424 @}
5425 @dots{} @}
5426 @end group
5427 @end smallexample
5428 @noindent
5429 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5430 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5431 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5432 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5433
5434 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5435
5436 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5437 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5438 @cindex section alignment
5439 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5440 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5441 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5442 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5443 value in that section.
5444 @smallexample
5445 @group
5446 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5447 .output @{
5448 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5449 @dots{}
5450 @}
5451 @dots{} @}
5452 @end group
5453 @end smallexample
5454
5455 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5456 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5457 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5458 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5459 section.
5460
5461 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5462 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5463 This is equivalent to either
5464 @smallexample
5465 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5466 @end smallexample
5467 or
5468 @smallexample
5469 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5470 @end smallexample
5471 @noindent
5472 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5473 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5474 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5475 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5476 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5477 bytes in the on-disk file.
5478
5479 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5480 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5481 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5482 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5483 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5484
5485 @noindent
5486 Example:
5487 @smallexample
5488 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5489 @end smallexample
5490
5491 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5492 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5493 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5494 evaluation purposes.
5495
5496 @smallexample
5497 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5498 @end smallexample
5499
5500 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5501 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5502 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5503 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5504 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5505 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5506 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5507 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5508 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5509 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5510
5511 @smallexample
5512 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5513 @end smallexample
5514
5515 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5516 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5517 @cindex symbol defaults
5518 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5519 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5520 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5521 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5522 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5523 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5524 existed, its value is preserved:
5525
5526 @smallexample
5527 @group
5528 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5529 .text : @{
5530 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5531 @dots{}
5532 @}
5533 @dots{}
5534 @}
5535 @end group
5536 @end smallexample
5537
5538 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5539 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5540 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5541
5542 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5543 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5544 @cindex section load address in expression
5545 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5546 the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5547 attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5548 Section LMA}).
5549
5550 @kindex MAX
5551 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5552 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5553
5554 @kindex MIN
5555 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5556 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5557
5558 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5559 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5560 @cindex unallocated address, next
5561 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5562 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5563 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5564 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5565
5566 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5567 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5568 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5569
5570 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5571 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5572 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5573 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5574 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5575 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5576 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5577 ``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5578 name.
5579
5580 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5581 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5582 @cindex section size
5583 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5584 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5585 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5586 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5587 @smallexample
5588 @group
5589 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5590 .output @{
5591 .start = . ;
5592 @dots{}
5593 .end = . ;
5594 @}
5595 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5596 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5597 @dots{} @}
5598 @end group
5599 @end smallexample
5600
5601 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5602 @itemx sizeof_headers
5603 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5604 @cindex header size
5605 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5606 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5607 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5608 choose, to facilitate paging.
5609
5610 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5611 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5612 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5613 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5614 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5615 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5616 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5617 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5618 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5619 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5620 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5621 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5622 @end table
5623
5624 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5625 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5626 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5627 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5628 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5629 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5630 linker will report an error.
5631
5632 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5633
5634 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5635 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5636 commands.
5637
5638 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5639 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5640 read. This can affect archive searching.
5641
5642 @ifset GENERIC
5643 @node Machine Dependent
5644 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5645
5646 @cindex machine dependencies
5647 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5648 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5649 functionality are not listed.
5650
5651 @menu
5652 @ifset H8300
5653 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5654 @end ifset
5655 @ifset I960
5656 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5657 @end ifset
5658 @ifset ARM
5659 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5660 @end ifset
5661 @ifset HPPA
5662 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5663 @end ifset
5664 @ifset M68K
5665 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5666 @end ifset
5667 @ifset MMIX
5668 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5669 @end ifset
5670 @ifset MSP430
5671 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5672 @end ifset
5673 @ifset M68HC11
5674 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5675 @end ifset
5676 @ifset POWERPC
5677 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5678 @end ifset
5679 @ifset POWERPC64
5680 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5681 @end ifset
5682 @ifset SPU
5683 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5684 @end ifset
5685 @ifset TICOFF
5686 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5687 @end ifset
5688 @ifset WIN32
5689 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5690 @end ifset
5691 @ifset XTENSA
5692 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5693 @end ifset
5694 @end menu
5695 @end ifset
5696
5697 @ifset H8300
5698 @ifclear GENERIC
5699 @raisesections
5700 @end ifclear
5701
5702 @node H8/300
5703 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5704
5705 @cindex H8/300 support
5706 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5707 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5708
5709 @table @emph
5710 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
5711 @item relaxing address modes
5712 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5713 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5714 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5715 respectively.
5716
5717 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5718 @item synthesizing instructions
5719 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5720 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5721 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5722 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5723 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5724 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5725 top page of memory).
5726
5727 @item bit manipulation instructions
5728 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
5729 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
5730 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5731 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5732 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
5733 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5734 the top page of memory).
5735
5736 @item system control instructions
5737 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
5738 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5739 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5740 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
5741 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5742 the top page of memory).
5743 @end table
5744
5745 @ifclear GENERIC
5746 @lowersections
5747 @end ifclear
5748 @end ifset
5749
5750 @ifclear GENERIC
5751 @ifset Renesas
5752 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
5753 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5754 @node Renesas
5755 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
5756
5757 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5758 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5759 options are required for these chips.
5760 @end ifset
5761 @end ifclear
5762
5763 @ifset I960
5764 @ifclear GENERIC
5765 @raisesections
5766 @end ifclear
5767
5768 @node i960
5769 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5770
5771 @cindex i960 support
5772
5773 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5774 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5775 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5776 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5777 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5778 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5779 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5780
5781 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5782 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5783 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5784 the names
5785
5786 @smallexample
5787 @group
5788 try
5789 libtry.a
5790 tryca
5791 libtryca.a
5792 @end group
5793 @end smallexample
5794
5795 @noindent
5796 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5797 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5798
5799 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5800 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5801 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5802 specifies a library.
5803
5804 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5805 @cindex relaxing on i960
5806 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5807 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5808 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5809 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5810 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5811 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5812 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5813 not itself call any subroutines).
5814
5815 @ifclear GENERIC
5816 @lowersections
5817 @end ifclear
5818 @end ifset
5819
5820 @ifset ARM
5821 @ifclear GENERIC
5822 @raisesections
5823 @end ifclear
5824
5825 @ifset M68HC11
5826 @ifclear GENERIC
5827 @raisesections
5828 @end ifclear
5829
5830 @node M68HC11/68HC12
5831 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5832
5833 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5834
5835 @subsection Linker Relaxation
5836
5837 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5838 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5839
5840 @table @emph
5841 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5842 @item relaxing address modes
5843 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5844 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5845 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5846 respectively.
5847
5848 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5849 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5850 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5851
5852 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
5853 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5854 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5855 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5856 @code{bset} instructions.
5857
5858 @end table
5859
5860 @subsection Trampoline Generation
5861
5862 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5863 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5864 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5865 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
5866 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
5867 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5868 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5869 point to the function trampoline.
5870
5871 @ifclear GENERIC
5872 @lowersections
5873 @end ifclear
5874 @end ifset
5875
5876 @node ARM
5877 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
5878
5879 @cindex ARM interworking support
5880 @kindex --support-old-code
5881 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
5882 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
5883 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5884 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5885 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5886 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5887 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5888 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5889 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5890 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5891
5892 @cindex thumb entry point
5893 @cindex entry point, thumb
5894 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5895 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5896 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5897 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5898 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5899 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5900
5901 @cindex PE import table prefixing
5902 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5903 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5904 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5905 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5906 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5907
5908 @cindex BE8
5909 @kindex --be8
5910 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5911 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5912 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5913
5914 @cindex TARGET1
5915 @kindex --target1-rel
5916 @kindex --target1-abs
5917 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5918 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5919 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5920 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5921
5922 @cindex TARGET2
5923 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
5924 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5925 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5926 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5927 @table @samp
5928 @item rel
5929 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5930 @item abs
5931 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
5932 @item got-rel
5933 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5934 @end table
5935
5936 @cindex FIX_V4BX
5937 @kindex --fix-v4bx
5938 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5939 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5940 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5941 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5942
5943 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5944 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5945 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5946
5947 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5948 relocations are ignored.
5949
5950 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5951 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5952 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5953 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5954
5955 @smallexample
5956 TST rM, #1
5957 MOVEQ PC, rM
5958 BX Rn
5959 @end smallexample
5960
5961 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5962 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5963 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5964
5965 @cindex USE_BLX
5966 @kindex --use-blx
5967 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5968 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5969 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5970 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5971 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5972
5973 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5974 specify it if you are using that target.
5975
5976 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5977 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5978 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5979 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5980 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5981 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5982 the support code can read the intended values.
5983
5984 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5985 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5986 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5987 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5988 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5989 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5990
5991 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5992 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5993 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5994 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5995 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5996 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5997
5998 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5999 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6000 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6001 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6002 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6003 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6004 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6005
6006 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6007 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6008 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6009 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6010 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6011 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6012 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6013 not be diagnosed.
6014
6015 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6016 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6017 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6018 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6019 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6020 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6021 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6022
6023 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6024 @kindex --pic-veneer
6025 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6026 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6027 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6028 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6029
6030 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6031 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6032 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6033 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6034 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6035 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6036 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6037 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6038 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6039 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6040 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6041 where they should be placed.
6042
6043 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6044 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6045 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6046 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6047 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6048 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6049 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6050 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6051 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6052 from the input sections.
6053
6054 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6055 @samp{N = +1}.
6056
6057 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6058 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6059 otherwise.
6060
6061 @ifclear GENERIC
6062 @lowersections
6063 @end ifclear
6064 @end ifset
6065
6066 @ifset HPPA
6067 @ifclear GENERIC
6068 @raisesections
6069 @end ifclear
6070
6071 @node HPPA ELF32
6072 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6073 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6074 @kindex --multi-subspace
6075 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6076 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6077 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6078 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6079 multiple sub-spaces.
6080
6081 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6082 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6083 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6084 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6085 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6086 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6087 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6088 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6089 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6090 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6091 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6092 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6093 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6094 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6095 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6096 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6097
6098 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6099 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6100 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6101 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6102
6103 @ifclear GENERIC
6104 @lowersections
6105 @end ifclear
6106 @end ifset
6107
6108 @ifset M68K
6109 @ifclear GENERIC
6110 @raisesections
6111 @end ifclear
6112
6113 @node M68K
6114 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6115
6116 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6117 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6118 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6119 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6120 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6121 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6122 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6123 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6124 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6125 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6126 support such GOTs.
6127 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6128 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6129 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6130 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6131
6132 @ifclear GENERIC
6133 @lowersections
6134 @end ifclear
6135 @end ifset
6136
6137 @ifset MMIX
6138 @ifclear GENERIC
6139 @raisesections
6140 @end ifclear
6141
6142 @node MMIX
6143 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6144 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6145 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6146 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6147 can translate between the two formats.
6148
6149 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6150 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6151 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6152 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6153 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6154 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6155 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6156 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6157
6158 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6159 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6160 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6161 of a section.
6162
6163 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6164 are left out from an mmo file.
6165
6166 @ifclear GENERIC
6167 @lowersections
6168 @end ifclear
6169 @end ifset
6170
6171 @ifset MSP430
6172 @ifclear GENERIC
6173 @raisesections
6174 @end ifclear
6175
6176 @node MSP430
6177 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6178 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6179 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6180 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6181
6182 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6183 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6184
6185 @table @code
6186 @item @samp{.vectors}
6187 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6188
6189 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6190 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6191 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6192
6193 @item @samp{.infomem}
6194 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6195 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6196
6197 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6198 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6199 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6200
6201 @item @samp{.noinit}
6202 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6203
6204 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6205 @end table
6206
6207 @ifclear GENERIC
6208 @lowersections
6209 @end ifclear
6210 @end ifset
6211
6212 @ifset POWERPC
6213 @ifclear GENERIC
6214 @raisesections
6215 @end ifclear
6216
6217 @node PowerPC ELF32
6218 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6219 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6220 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6221 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6222 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6223 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6224 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6225 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6226 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6227 section exceeds 33M in size.
6228
6229 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6230 @table @option
6231 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6232 @kindex --bss-plt
6233 @item --bss-plt
6234 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6235 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6236 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6237 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6238 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6239 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6240 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6241 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6242
6243 @kindex --secure-plt
6244 @item --secure-plt
6245 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6246 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6247 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6248 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6249 style BSS PLT.
6250
6251 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6252 @kindex --sdata-got
6253 @item --sdata-got
6254 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6255 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6256 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6257 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6258 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6259 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6260 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6261 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6262 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6263 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6264 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6265 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6266
6267 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6268 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6269 @item --emit-stub-syms
6270 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6271 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6272
6273 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6274 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6275 @item --no-tls-optimize
6276 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6277 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6278 disable the optimization.
6279 @end table
6280
6281 @ifclear GENERIC
6282 @lowersections
6283 @end ifclear
6284 @end ifset
6285
6286 @ifset POWERPC64
6287 @ifclear GENERIC
6288 @raisesections
6289 @end ifclear
6290
6291 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6292 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6293
6294 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6295 @table @option
6296 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6297 @kindex --stub-group-size
6298 @item --stub-group-size
6299 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6300 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6301 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6302 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6303 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6304 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6305 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6306 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6307 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6308 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6309 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6310 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6311 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6312 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6313
6314 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6315 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6316 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6317 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6318
6319 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6320 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6321 @item --emit-stub-syms
6322 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6323 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6324
6325 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6326 @kindex --dotsyms
6327 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6328 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6329 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6330 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6331 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6332 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6333 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6334 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6335 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6336 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6337 feature.
6338
6339 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6340 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6341 @item --no-tls-optimize
6342 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6343 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6344 disable the optimization.
6345
6346 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6347 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6348 @item --no-opd-optimize
6349 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6350 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6351 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6352 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6353
6354 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6355 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6356 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6357 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6358 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6359 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6360 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6361
6362 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6363 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6364 @item --no-toc-optimize
6365 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6366 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6367 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6368 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6369 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6370 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6371 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6372 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6373 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6374 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6375 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6376 optimization.
6377
6378 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6379 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6380 @item --no-multi-toc
6381 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6382 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6383 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6384 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6385 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6386 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6387 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6388 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6389 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6390 @end table
6391
6392 @ifclear GENERIC
6393 @lowersections
6394 @end ifclear
6395 @end ifset
6396
6397 @ifset SPU
6398 @ifclear GENERIC
6399 @raisesections
6400 @end ifclear
6401
6402 @node SPU ELF
6403 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6404
6405 @cindex SPU ELF options
6406 @table @option
6407
6408 @cindex SPU plugins
6409 @kindex --plugin
6410 @item --plugin
6411 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6412
6413 @cindex SPU overlays
6414 @kindex --no-overlays
6415 @item --no-overlays
6416 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6417 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6418 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6419 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6420
6421 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6422 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6423 @item --emit-stub-syms
6424 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6425 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6426
6427 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6428 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6429 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6430 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6431 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6432 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6433
6434 @cindex SPU local store size
6435 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6436 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6437 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6438 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6439 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6440
6441 @cindex SPU
6442 @kindex --stack-analysis
6443 @item --stack-analysis
6444 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6445 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6446 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6447 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6448 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6449 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6450 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6451 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6452 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6453 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6454 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6455 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6456 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6457 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6458 and calls will be given.
6459
6460 @cindex SPU
6461 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6462 @item --emit-stack-syms
6463 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6464 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6465 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6466 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6467 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6468 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6469 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6470 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6471 @end table
6472
6473 @ifclear GENERIC
6474 @lowersections
6475 @end ifclear
6476 @end ifset
6477
6478 @ifset TICOFF
6479 @ifclear GENERIC
6480 @raisesections
6481 @end ifclear
6482
6483 @node TI COFF
6484 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6485 @cindex TI COFF versions
6486 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6487 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6488 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6489 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6490 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6491 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6492
6493 @ifclear GENERIC
6494 @lowersections
6495 @end ifclear
6496 @end ifset
6497
6498 @ifset WIN32
6499 @ifclear GENERIC
6500 @raisesections
6501 @end ifclear
6502
6503 @node WIN32
6504 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6505
6506 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6507 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6508 command line options mentioned here.
6509
6510 @table @emph
6511 @cindex import libraries
6512 @item import libraries
6513 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6514 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6515 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6516 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6517 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6518 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6519
6520 @item exporting DLL symbols
6521 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6522 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6523
6524 @table @emph
6525 @item using auto-export functionality
6526 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6527 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6528 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6529
6530 @itemize
6531 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6532 @item --exclude-symbols
6533 @item --exclude-libs
6534 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6535 @end itemize
6536
6537 If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6538 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6539 if either of the following are true:
6540
6541 @itemize
6542 @item A DEF file is used.
6543 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6544 @end itemize
6545
6546 @item using a DEF file
6547 @cindex using a DEF file
6548 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6549 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6550 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6551 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6552 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6553
6554 @example
6555 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6556 @end example
6557
6558 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6559 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6560
6561 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6562
6563 @example
6564 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6565
6566 EXPORTS
6567 foo
6568 bar
6569 _bar = bar
6570 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6571 var1 DATA
6572 @end example
6573
6574 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6575 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6576 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6577 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6578 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6579 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6580
6581 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6582 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6583 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6584
6585 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6586 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6587 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6588 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6589
6590 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6591 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6592 non-default base address for the image.
6593
6594 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6595 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6596 filename specified on the command line.
6597
6598 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6599
6600 @example
6601 EXPORTS
6602 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6603 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6604 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
6605 @end example
6606
6607 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6608 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6609 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6610 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6611 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6612 @samp{<integer>} alias.
6613
6614 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6615
6616 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6617 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6618 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6619 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6620 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6621
6622 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6623 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6624 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6625 @code{*_imp__foo}).
6626
6627 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6628 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6629 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6630 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6631 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6632 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6633 application will behave unexpectedly.
6634
6635 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6636 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6637 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6638 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6639 the DLL without an import library.
6640
6641 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6642 other DEF file statements
6643
6644 @cindex creating a DEF file
6645 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6646 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6647
6648 @item Using decorations
6649 @cindex Using decorations
6650 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6651 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6652 declared as:
6653
6654 @example
6655 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6656 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6657 @end example
6658
6659 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6660 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6661 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6662 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6663
6664 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6665 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
6666 instead:
6667
6668 @example
6669 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6670 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6671 @end example
6672
6673 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6674 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6675 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6676 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
6677 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6678 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6679 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6680 information.
6681 @end table
6682
6683 @cindex automatic data imports
6684 @item automatic data imports
6685 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6686 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6687 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6688 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6689 code to these platforms, especially for large
6690 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
6691 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6692 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6693 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6694 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6695 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6696 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6697 trigger the feature's use.
6698
6699 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
6700 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6701
6702 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
6703 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6704
6705 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6706 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6707 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
6708 below.
6709
6710 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
6711 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6712 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6713 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6714 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6715 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
6716 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
6717 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
6718 references.
6719
6720 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6721 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6722 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6723 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6724 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6725 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
6726 run without error on an older system.
6727
6728 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6729 enabled as needed.
6730
6731 @cindex direct linking to a dll
6732 @item direct linking to a dll
6733 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6734 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
6735 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
6736 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
6737 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6738 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6739 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
6740 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
6741 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
6742 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6743
6744 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
6745 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
6746 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
6747 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6748 select the dll instead of an import library.
6749
6750
6751 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6752 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
6753
6754 @example
6755 libxxx.dll.a
6756 xxx.dll.a
6757 libxxx.a
6758 xxx.lib
6759 cygxxx.dll (*)
6760 libxxx.dll
6761 xxx.dll
6762 @end example
6763
6764 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6765
6766 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6767 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6768 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6769 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
6770 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6771
6772 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6773 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
6774 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6775 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6776 could coexist on the same machine.
6777
6778 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6779 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
6780 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
6781
6782 @example
6783 bin/
6784 cygxxx.dll
6785 lib/
6786 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
6787 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
6788 @end example
6789
6790 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6791 done two ways:
6792
6793 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6794 @example
6795 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
6796 @end example
6797
6798 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6799 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6800 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6801 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6802
6803 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6804 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6805 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6806 making the app/dll.
6807
6808 @example
6809 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
6810 @end example
6811
6812 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6813
6814 @example
6815 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
6816 @end example
6817
6818 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6819 perfectly legal
6820
6821 @example
6822 bin/
6823 cygxxx-5.dll
6824 lib/
6825 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
6826 @end example
6827
6828 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
6829 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6830 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6831
6832 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
6833 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
6834
6835 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6836 work with auto-imported data.
6837
6838 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6839 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6840 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6841 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6842 possible to do this without an import lib.
6843
6844 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6845 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6846 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6847 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6848
6849 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
6850 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6851 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6852 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
6853 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6854 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6855 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
6856
6857 @item symbol aliasing
6858 @table @emph
6859 @item adding additional names
6860 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
6861 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6862 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6863 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
6864 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
6865
6866 @example
6867 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6868
6869 EXPORTS
6870 foo
6871 _foo = foo
6872 @end example
6873
6874 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6875
6876 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6877 source code using the "weak" attribute:
6878
6879 @example
6880 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
6881 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
6882 @end example
6883
6884 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6885 symbols.
6886
6887 @item renaming symbols
6888 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
6889 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
6890 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6891 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
6892 created). In the following example:
6893
6894 @example
6895 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6896
6897 EXPORTS
6898 _foo = foo
6899 @end example
6900
6901 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6902 @samp{_foo}.
6903 @end table
6904
6905 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
6906 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
6907 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
6908 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6909 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6910 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6911 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6912 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6913 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6914 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
6915 which is probably not what you wanted.
6916
6917 @cindex weak externals
6918 @item weak externals
6919 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6920 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6921 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6922 are three variants of weak externals:
6923 @itemize
6924 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6925 called lazy externals.
6926 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6927 This form is not presently implemented.
6928 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6929 implemented.
6930 @end itemize
6931 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6932 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6933 uses a default value.
6934 @end table
6935
6936 @ifclear GENERIC
6937 @lowersections
6938 @end ifclear
6939 @end ifset
6940
6941 @ifset XTENSA
6942 @ifclear GENERIC
6943 @raisesections
6944 @end ifclear
6945
6946 @node Xtensa
6947 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6948
6949 @cindex Xtensa processors
6950 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6951 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6952 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6953 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6954 example, with the command:
6955
6956 @smallexample
6957 SECTIONS
6958 @{
6959 .text : @{
6960 *(.literal .text)
6961 @}
6962 @}
6963 @end smallexample
6964
6965 @noindent
6966 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6967 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6968 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6969 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6970 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6971 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6972 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
6973
6974 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
6975 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
6976 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6977 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6978 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6979 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6980 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6981 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6982 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6983 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6984 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6985 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6986
6987 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6988 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6989 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6990 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6991 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6992 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6993 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6994 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6995 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6996 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6997 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6998 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6999 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7000 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7001
7002 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7003 control the linker:
7004
7005 @cindex Xtensa options
7006 @table @option
7007 @kindex --no-relax
7008 @item --no-relax
7009 Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7010 by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7011 relaxation.
7012
7013 @item --size-opt
7014 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7015 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7016 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7017 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7018 preserve the correctness of the code.
7019 @end table
7020
7021 @ifclear GENERIC
7022 @lowersections
7023 @end ifclear
7024 @end ifset
7025
7026 @ifclear SingleFormat
7027 @node BFD
7028 @chapter BFD
7029
7030 @cindex back end
7031 @cindex object file management
7032 @cindex object formats available
7033 @kindex objdump -i
7034 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7035 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7036 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7037 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7038 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7039 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7040 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7041 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7042 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7043
7044 @cindex BFD requirements
7045 @cindex requirements for BFD
7046 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7047 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7048 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7049 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7050 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7051 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7052 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7053
7054 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7055 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7056 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7057 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7058
7059 @menu
7060 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7061 @end menu
7062
7063 @node BFD outline
7064 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7065 @cindex opening object files
7066 @include bfdsumm.texi
7067 @end ifclear
7068
7069 @node Reporting Bugs
7070 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7071 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7072 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7073
7074 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7075
7076 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7077 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7078 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7079 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7080 @command{ld}.
7081
7082 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7083 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7084
7085 @menu
7086 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7087 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7088 @end menu
7089
7090 @node Bug Criteria
7091 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7092 @cindex bug criteria
7093
7094 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7095
7096 @itemize @bullet
7097 @cindex fatal signal
7098 @cindex linker crash
7099 @cindex crash of linker
7100 @item
7101 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7102 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7103
7104 @cindex error on valid input
7105 @item
7106 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7107
7108 @cindex invalid input
7109 @item
7110 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7111 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7112 object files are correct.
7113
7114 @item
7115 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7116 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7117 @end itemize
7118
7119 @node Bug Reporting
7120 @section How to Report Bugs
7121 @cindex bug reports
7122 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7123
7124 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7125 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7126 recommend you contact that organization first.
7127
7128 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7129 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7130 distribution.
7131
7132 @ifset BUGURL
7133 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7134 @value{BUGURL}.
7135 @end ifset
7136
7137 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7138 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7139 fact or leave it out, state it!
7140
7141 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7142 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7143 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7144 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7145 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7146 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7147 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7148 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7149 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7150 and the most helpful.
7151
7152 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7153 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7154 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7155
7156 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7157 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7158 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7159 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7160
7161 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7162
7163 @itemize @bullet
7164 @item
7165 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7166 the @samp{--version} argument.
7167
7168 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7169 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7170
7171 @item
7172 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7173 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7174
7175 @item
7176 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7177 version number.
7178
7179 @item
7180 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7181 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7182
7183 @item
7184 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7185 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7186 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7187 sufficient.
7188
7189 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7190 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7191
7192 @item
7193 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7194 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7195 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7196 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7197 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7198 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7199 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7200 attachments are best.
7201
7202 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7203 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7204 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7205 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7206 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7207
7208 @item
7209 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7210 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7211
7212 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7213 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7214 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7215 a chance to make a mistake.
7216
7217 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7218 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7219 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7220 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7221 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7222 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7223 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7224 any conclusion from our observations.
7225
7226 @item
7227 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7228 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7229 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7230 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7231 context, not by line number.
7232
7233 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7234 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7235 @end itemize
7236
7237 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7238
7239 @itemize @bullet
7240 @item
7241 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7242
7243 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7244 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7245 changes will not affect it.
7246
7247 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7248 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7249 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7250 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7251
7252 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7253 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7254 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7255 less time, and so on.
7256
7257 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7258 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7259
7260 @item
7261 A patch for the bug.
7262
7263 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7264 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7265 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7266 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7267
7268 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7269 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7270 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7271 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7272 fixed.
7273
7274 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7275 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7276 help us to understand.
7277
7278 @item
7279 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7280
7281 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7282 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7283 @end itemize
7284
7285 @node MRI
7286 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7287 @cindex MRI compatibility
7288 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7289 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7290 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7291 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7292 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7293 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7294 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7295
7296 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7297 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7298 features to make use of them.
7299
7300 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7301 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7302
7303 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7304 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7305 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7306 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7307 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7308
7309 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7310
7311 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7312 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7313 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7314
7315 @table @code
7316 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7317 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7318 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7319 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7320 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7321 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7322 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7323 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7324 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7325 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7326 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7327
7328 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7329 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7330 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7331 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7332
7333 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7334
7335 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7336 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7337 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7338 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7339
7340 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7341 @item BASE @var{expression}
7342 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7343 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7344
7345 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7346 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7347 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7348 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7349
7350 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7351 @item END
7352 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7353
7354 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7355 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7356 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7357 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7358
7359 @enumerate
7360 @item
7361 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7362
7363 @item
7364 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7365
7366 @item
7367 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7368 @samp{COFF}
7369 @end enumerate
7370
7371 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7372 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7373 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7374 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7375
7376 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7377 same line, with no change in its effect.
7378
7379 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7380 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7381 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7382 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7383 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7384 command line.
7385
7386 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7387 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7388 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7389 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7390 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7391
7392 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7393 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7394 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7395 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7396 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7397 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7398 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7399 file, in the order specified.
7400
7401 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7402 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7403 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7404 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7405 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7406 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7407
7408 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7409 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7410 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7411 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7412 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7413 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7414 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7415 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7416 @end table
7417
7418 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7419 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7420 @include fdl.texi
7421
7422 @node LD Index
7423 @unnumbered LD Index
7424
7425 @printindex cp
7426
7427 @tex
7428 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7429 % meantime:
7430 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7431 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7432 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7433 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7434 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7435 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7436 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7437 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7438 \page\colophon
7439 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7440 @end tex
7441
7442 @bye
This page took 0.233898 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.